University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF...

265
23'5'15 ¡t Cephalometric Evaluation of Mandibular Relapse followirg Vertical Subsigmoid Osteotomy Martin Ching, B. D. Sc. (Melb.) Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Faculty of Dentistry The University of Adelaide South Australia 1.995 fir"o¡''ioc( l.1i;{

Transcript of University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF...

Page 1: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

23'5'15

¡t

Cephalometric Evaluation of

Mandibular Relapse followirg

Vertical Subsigmoid Osteotomy

Martin Ching, B. D. Sc. (Melb.)

Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery

Faculty of Dentistry

The University of Adelaide

South Australia

1.995

fir"o¡''ioc( l.1i;{

Page 2: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES.................

LIST OF TABLES...................

1..1 Oaeraiew.......

1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy.

T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE.............

CIIAPTER 2. Manilibulør prognøthism...

2.1 Definition

2,2 Classification of mandibulør prognøthism......................

2.3 Incidence of møndibular prognathism............

2.4 Surgery for the treatment of mandibular prognathism

2.5 Complications of aertical subsigmoid osteotomy

2.5.1 Intraoperatioe complications..........

2.5.2 Immediate postoperatiae complications..............

2.5.3 D elay ed postoper atiae complicøtions.............

8

11

74SUMMARY.........

STATEMENT.........

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.........

I INTRODUCTION.........

CIIAPTER 1. Cephølometric eztøluøtion of reløpse following

o ertic al sub sigmo iil o ste of o rny ............

18

19

1,6

77

27

22

23

23

23

27

30

36

38

42

45

48

79

2,5.4 Complications øssociated with extraoral approach.....

Page 3: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

3

CHAPTER 3,

Intr oducti0n.................

Orthodontics and occlusion..

4.2.1 Postoperatiae mønagement.

Magnitude of mandibular setback..

Reløpse f ollowing zt ertical sub sigmoid

o steotomy ............... 51

3.L Defining postsurgical relapse 51

3.2 Measurement of postsurgical relapse .........53

3.3 Early, intermediate and long term relapse...... ...........56

CIIAPTER 4, Føctors øssociøted with postsurgical relapse

following oerticøl subsigmoid osteotorny..................,.......... 60

4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

..60

65

66

Condylar position .......67

Proximal and distøl segment positioning ......77

4.5.1 Rotational et'fects between fragments .................72

4.5.2 Medial displacement ot' proximal segment... ....73

4.5.3 Wire osteosynthesis between the proximal and

distal segments 74

4.6 Maxillomandibular fixøtion... 76

4.6.L Period of maxillomøndibulør fixation 76

4.6.3 Wires 79

4.6.4 Skeletal fixation... 79

4,6.5 Nutritional aspects ot' healing. 80

4.7 Muscular interactions........... 82

4.7.1 Tongue pressure after reduction of tongue space.................,..........82

4.7.2 Bite force and its aector componenús............ 87

874.7.3 Masticatory muscles........

4.8 Vascular considerøtions of osseous segments. .........89

Page 4: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

4

4.8.L Healing of osseous segments..

4.8.2 Viability ot' osseous segments

4.9 Growth

4.9.L Normal growth

4.9.2 Hemimandibular elongøtion

hy p erplasia ..............

Single jazo aersus bimnxillary procedures.....

Cor onoidect omy .............

High angle mandibles

and hemimandibular

89

90

90

90

95

96

97

97

99

99

' CIIAPTER 5. Cephø\ometry..........

5.1. Introduction............

5.2 Eruorsofprojection.............,.

4.10

4.11

4.1.2

5.3

101

Errors of superimposition....

5.4 Eruors of landmark identification

5.5 Errors of digitising.............

103

105

1,07

5.6 Enors of measurement.........

5.7 The selection of a suitable line of reference...

III MATERIALSANDMETHODS...............

CHAPTER 6. Eaaluation of postsurgical rclapse..

6.L Selection of patient records......

6.2 Radiographic technique.

6.3 Tracing and digitising procedure....

6.4 Reference points and lines

6.4.1. Hard and soft tissue points

6.4.2 Cephalometric lines

6.4.3 Calculation of linear ønd angular oariables.,

6.5 Statistical analysis

108

1,09

't72

113

113

776

779

722

722

125

127

130

Page 5: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

5

CHAPTER 7. Erors of the method

7.1 Materials and methods... 732

132

737

147

1,42

742

1,42

1.45

145

IV RESULTS 736

CHAPTER 8. Early, intermeiliate anil long term dentoskeletal effects

following zterticøl subsigmoiil osteotottty ...........................737

8.1 Intr o duction............

8.2 Analysis of aariables by gr0ups............... ......737

8.2.1. Horizontal mandibular mooement at Point 8................................739

8.3 Analysis of aøriables 739

8.3.1 Mandibular mooement............. 1,40

8.3.L.1. Horizontal set bøck and re1apse.............. ....740

8.3.1.2 Vertical moaement and relapse........

8.3.7.3 Angle SNB

8.3.2 Proximal and distal segment ølteration.

8.3.2.1 Condylar displacement (S-HA)

8.3.2.2 Posterior facial height ................143

8.3.2.3 Anterior føcial height

8.3.2.4 Mandibular plane angle ( SN-Go-Me)............ ............ 1,44

8.3.3 Segmental inter-relationships

8.3.3.L Gonial angle (Ar-Go-Mù.............

8.3.3.2

8.3.4 Dentoskeletal changes

8.3.4.L

8.3.4.5 Oaerbite.

1,46

Maxillary incisal ang1e........ .......746

8.3.4.2 lnterincisal ang1e........ 1,46

748

8.3.5 Sex of patients.... 1,49

Page 6: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

6

8.3.6 Períod of maxillomandibulør fixation

8.3,7 Age of patient at time of surgery

8.3.8 Orthodontics aetsus no orthodontics

8.3.9 Influence of maxillary surgery

8.3.9.1 Horizontal moaement and relapse

8.3.9.2 Vertical moaement and reløpse.....

8.3.1-0 Influence ot' hyoid position

8.3.1.0.1, Horizontal moaement and relapse

8.3.L0.2 Vertical mor¡ement and relapse......

8.3.1-1 Pharyngeal depth (AP-PP)...

8.3.11.1 Horizontal mooement and relapse

8.3.1,1.2 Vertical mooement and relapse...

8.4 Complications following aertical subsigmoid osteotomy

8.4.1- Intraoperatiae complications

8.4.1,.1, Haemorrhage.........

8.4.2 Immediate postoperatiae complications...........

8.4.2.L Condylar dislocation

8.4.3 Deløyed postoperatiae complications............

8.4.3.1 Postoperatiae int'ection..

8.4.3.2 Sequestration of proximal segment

CIIAPTER 9. Results: Errors of the method

9.L Error ot' the method

150

151

151

1.52

1,52

153

153

1,il

1,54

155

155

156

1,56

1,57

757

757

757

757

158

158

158

759

759

Page 7: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

7

V DISCUSSION.........

CH,APTEIR 1.0, Discussiott...............

10.1 Patient selection

10.2 Materiøls and methods

11.9 Growth.......

11.10 Single jaw as bimaxillary procedures.

7L.12 High angle mandibles

vr coNcLUSroNS........

CIIAPTER 1.2. Conclusions.

VII APPENDIX.....

Appendix - Intraoral vertical subsigmoid osteotomy.........

VIII BIBLIOGRAPHY.

776

173

774

774

194

795

197

798

204

205

CH,APTER 77. Discussion - Factors in reløpse of zsertical

subsigmoiil osteotoffiy....,...... ...............778

Ll.L Definition of relapse.. 778

LL.2 Orthodontics and occlusion...........¡....... ........778

11.3 Møgnitude of mandibular setback 180

1-1-.4 Condylar position 181

11.5 Rotational effects between fragments.. 183

11.6 Wire osteosynthesis between the proximal and distal segments 7U

LL.7 Møxillomandibular fixation... 185

LL.8 Muscular interactions................... .1,87

789

11..11 Coronoidectomy....... ......792

.792

192

B iblio gr aphV ..........

Page 8: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

8

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 2.1

Figure 2.2

Figure 2.3

Figure 2.4

Figure 4.1

Figure 5.L

Figure 6.1

Figure 9.1

Figure 9.2

Calculation of the enlargement factor for points lying

on the mid-sagittal plane.

Figure 6.2 Hard and soft tissue points listed in order of

digitising sequence.

Figure 6.3

Figure 6.4

Figure 7.L

Variations of skeletal pattern of Class III malocclusions.

Surgical techniques performed in the vertical rami

of mandible to correct mandibular prognathism.

Mandibular divergence angle.

Panoramic radiograph showing anterior dislocation

of the right mandibular condyle....

Average growth curves for males and females..

Reference lines.

Differences between digitised double determinations

for nasion (N). ..........

Differences between digitised double determinations

Cephalometric lines.

Angular and linear variables used to evaluate

dentoskeletal changes following vertical subsigmoid

osteotomy. .............. ...........129

Hard and soft tissue points listed in order of digitising

s€quence. 133

26

31

34

4't

93

111

118

727

126

1,63

763

.764

Figure 9.3 Differences between digitised double determinations

for orbitale (Or)......

Figure 9.4 Differences between digitised double determinations

for condylion (Co)... 764

Page 9: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

9

Figure 9.5 Differences between digitised double determinations

for hinge axis (HA). 765

Figure 9.6 Differences between digitised double determinations

for articulare (Ar). 165

Figure 9.7 Differences between digitised double determinations

for gonion (Go)......... 766

Figure 9.8 Differences between digitised double determinations

for menton (Me)...... 1,66

Figure 9.9 Differences between digitised double determinations

for pogonion (Pg). ...1,67

Figure 9.10 Differences between digitised double determinations

't67

Figure 9.11 Differences between digitised double determinations

..168

Figure 9.1,2 Differences between digitised double determinations

for ANS. 1,68

Figure 9.L3 Differences between digitised double determinations

for PNS... ..........1,69

Figure 9.L4 Differences between digitised double determinations

for upper incisal tip (IS). 1,69

Figure 9.L5 Differences between digitised double determinations

for upper incisal apex (AS) ...............770

Figure 9.L6 Differences between digitised double determinations

for lower incisal tip (AI). 770

Figure 9.L7 Differences between digitised double determinations

for lower incisal apex (II). .................777

Figure 9.L8 Differences between digitised double determinations

for upper molar crown (MS). 171,

Page 10: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

10

Figure 9.19 Differences between digitised double determinations

for lower molar crown (MI).......... ....172

Figure 11.1 Mandibular relapse identified on clinical review ........,..191,

Page 11: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

77

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1.1 Synonyms used to describe the vertical subsigmoid

osteotomy. ...... 2"1

Table 2.1

Table2.2

Table 2.3

Table2.4

Table 2.5

Table 2.6

Table 4.1

Table 6.1

Table 6.2

Table 6.3

Table 7.1

Table 8.1

Table 8.2

Table 8.3

Table 8.4

Table 8.5

Table 8.6

Table 8.7

Prevalence of Class III malocclusions (Iacobsen et al. 1974)...........29

Prevalence of Class III malocclusions (Lew et al. L993)...................2g

Historical review of surgery to treat mandibular

prognathism................. 35

Percentage of complications with mandibular surgery .................. 36

Incidence of neurosensory deficit - sagittal split

osteotomy of the mandible

Incidence of neurosensory deficit - horizontal

42

osteotomy of the mandible 42

Table 3.1 Amount of mandibular setback and landmarks

used for measurements.... 53

Period of maxillomandibular fixation ..........76

Procedures performed in conjunction with vertical

subsigmoid osteotomy........... ...........115

Age at operation

Statistical analysis of mandibular relapse following

vertical subsigmoid osteotomy....... 130

Statistical analysis of the experimental error. 734

Comparison of relapse at point B(x) for group I...............................138

Comparison of relapse at point B(x) for group II.............................138

Comparison of relapse at point B(x) for group III............................139

Comparison of relapse at point B(x) for group IV...........................139

Comparison of relapse at point B(x) between groups.....................140

Comparison of relapse at point B(y) between groups............... ......140

11,6

Comparison of relapse at point B(x) - pooled data. 741

Page 12: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

72

Table 8.8

Table 8.9

Table 8.L0

Comparison of relapse at point B(y) - pooled data...........................741,

Comparison of relapse for angle SNB - pooled data. .....'1.42

Comparison of relapse for distance S - HA(y)

143

Table 3.1L Comparison of relapse for distance S - HA(x)

- pooled data................

Table 8.12 Comparison of relapse for distance PFH

- pooled data..................

Table 8.13 Comparison of relapse for distance AFH

- pooled data...... 1/1 Á

743

7M

..1,49

Table 8.14 Comparison of relapse for mandibular plane angle (SN-Go-Me)

Table 8.15 Comparison of relapse for gonial angle (Ar-Go-Me)

- pooled data................

745

145

Table 8.16 Comparison of relapse for ramal angle ( SN-Ar-Go)

- pooled data.................. 746

Table 8.17 Comparison of relapse for angle Mx 1 SN

1,46

Table 8.L8 Comparison of relapse for interincisal angle

Comparison of relapse for angle IMPA - pooled data......... ............147

Comparison of relapse for overjet - pooled data.......... ...748

Comparison of relapse for overbite - pooled data............................749

Comparison of diffe¡ences in relapse at point B(x)

for sexes.

Table 8.19

Table 8.20

Table 8.21

Table 8.22

Table 8.23 Comparison of differences in relapse at point B(y)

for sexes

1,49

Table 8.24 Period of maxillomandibular fixation 150

Page 13: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

13

Table 8.25 Comparison of relapse with different periods of

maxillomandibular fixation.

Comparison of relapse at point B(x) for age and sex...........

Comparison of relapse between orthodontics aersus

no orthodontics....

150

151Table 8.26

Table8.27

Table 8.28

Table 8.29

Table 8.30

Table 8.3L

Table 8.32

Table 8.33

Table 8.34

Table 8.35

Table 9.1

Comparison of relapse for point A(x) - pooled data................

Comparison of relapse for point A(y) - pooled data................

Comparison of relapse for angle SNA - pooled data..............

Horizontal movement of hyoid bone and

subsequent relapse

752

153

153

754

...754

155

155

1.56

1,56

762

Comparison of relapse for point H(x) - pooled data.........

Comparison of relapse for point H(y) - pooled data.........

Comparison of relapse for pharyngeal depth

tAp - PP(x)l - pooled data..........

Comparison of relapse for pharyngeal depth

lAp - PP(y)l - pooled data..........

Error for hard tissue points (horizontal axis) by double

determination..................

Table 9.2 Error for hard tissue points (vertical axis) by double

determination............

Page 14: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

1.4

SUMMARY

A retrospective cephalometric study was undertaken to evaluate the long term

relapse potential following surgical setback of the mandible using the technique

of intraoral vertical subsigmoid osteotomy.

The investigation involved a detailed analysis of 24 sets of serial cephalometric

records consisting of 72 males and 12 females, in the Oral and Maxillofacial

Surgery Unit, The University of Adelaide. Of the 24 sets of patient records, 19

had longitudinal radiographs which had been taken a minimum of two years

following surgery. This series was studied for long term relapse.

The 24 records were assigned to one of four groups:

Group I: consisted of bimaxillary osteotomies in which a standard Le Fort I

maxillary osteotomy was performed in conjunction with the

intraoral vertical subsigmoid osteotomy (n = 1.4).

Grouo II:+ consisted of bimaxillary osteotomies in which a segmental Le Fort I

maxillary osteotomy was performed in conjunction with the

intraoral vertical subsigmoid osteotomy (n = 6).

Group III: consisted of bimaxillary osteotomies in which a quadrangular Le

Fort II maxillary osteotomy was performed in conjunction with the

intraoral vertical subsigmoid osteotomy (n = 2).

Page 15: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

15

Group IV: consisted of intraoral vertical subsigmoid osteotomies only (n = 2).

Relapse was measured over the short, intermediate, and long term and

correlated with selected cephalometric variables. The results of the short term

study showed that minimal relapse occurred. The long term results showed a

further setback of the mandible occurring at the skeletal level, measured at point

B. The occlusion was maintained and was clinically acceptable. In one patient

only, significant relapse did occur and this was attributed primarily to surgery

being undertaken prior to the completion of growth.

In correlating factors which were associated with skeletal relapse following

mandibular setback, muscle forces, in particular the tongue, were identified to be

an important secondary factor. The hyoid bone was investigated to determine

its role in the relapse potential of the mandible following surgery as its position

reflects the position of the tongue which has been implicated as a causative

factor in relapse. A general trend was found whereby the hyoid bone position

initially moved down and backwards with the setback of the mandible,

presumably to maintain airway patency, but this slowly returned towards its

former position, although only in the horizontal direction. In the vertical

direction, the tongue occupied a more superior position and this was

maintained in the long term analysis.

Page 16: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

76

STATEMENT

This thesis is submitted in partial fulfilment of the requirements for the degree

of Master of Dental Surgery. I declare that the text of this thesis has not been

previously published or written by another person except where due reference is

made. The findings are the result of my personal investigations. No part of this

work has been previously submitted for a degree in any University.

I give consent to this copy of my thesis, when deposited in the University Library,being available for photocopying and loan.

Martin Ching, B.D.Sc. (Melb.)

The University of Adelaide,

January 1,995.

Page 17: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

77

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I wish to acknowledge the opportunity, given to me by Professor Alastair N.

Goss in 1989, to pursue a career in Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery. I thank you

sincerely. He has devoted considerable time and effort to ensure that I complete

my training in the specialty of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery and I am very

appreciative of his leadership and guidance. To Dr. R.H.B. Jones, I thank you for

fostering in me all your surgical and clinical skills and expertise (1989-7993). My

sincerest thanks also go to Professor Tasman Brown whose assistance was most

valuable in collating and formatting the computer data.

I wish to also thank the Consultant Surgeons who have taught me so much

clinically and personally and to all the surgical Registrars with whom I have

been associated. In particular, I am indebted to Dr. Richard Hing for giving me

the impetus to pursue this topic as my Masters degree.

To my mother and father, I am gratefully indebted for all their trust and support

over all the difficult and trying years.

To all the assistants who helped in this research, I thank you

And finally to my grandmothers, Mrs. Lee Shee Ching, to whom I promised I

would complete medicine, passed away on 23rd April 1979 and Mrs. Siu King

Cheung, who passed away on 10th December 7993, during which time I was

preparing this thesis:

" This one's for you ! "

Page 18: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

18

I

INTRODUCTION

Page 19: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

CHAPTER 1,

CEPHALOMETRIC EVALUATION OF RELAPSE FOLLOWING BILATERAL

VERTICAL SUBSIGMOID OSTEOTOMY

l.L OVERVIEW

The prognathic mandible is a deformity which can display a variety of

functional and cosmetic disadvantages. Chapter L outlines the incidence and

nature of the prognathic mandible. The vertical subsigmoid osteotomy is a

proven surgical technique used to correct deformities associated with the

mandible. In particular, its usefulness is praised in the treatment of prognathic

mandibles. Relapse associated with this technique was initially unquestioned

and intensive assessment of the long term results since then has revealed

analyses supporting its stability. Many variables are implicated when relapse

does occur and Chapter 4 details these factors. Although the vertical subsigmoid

osteotomy is a user friendly technique with minimal morbidity some

complications can occur and these are presented in Chapter 2.

Relapse is a term which necessitates clarification on how it is defined. Chapter 3

discusses the use of this term. The most appropriate method for analysing

relapse is by cephalometric evaluation. Cephalometry is a subject encompassing

much information and a discussion of this subject is presented in Chapter 5.

Review of the literature identified a number of variables which provoked

thought and consequently several aims were established for investigation.

Page 20: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

20

1

The objectives of the study were:

To retrieve data from the files of the Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery Unit on

patients who had mandibular setback using the vertical subsigmoid

osteotomy.

2. To quantify the amount of relapse of the mandible following setback using

the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy.

3. To establish whether patient sex or age influenced relapse

4. To establish the degree of association of the reported variables and the

amount of mandibular relapse.

The investigation involved a detailed analysis of 24 sets of radiographs, each

radiograph being assigned to one of four groups, with all groups having either

vertical subsigmoid osteotomy only or in combination with other surgery. The

material and methods are outlined in Chapter 6 and the methodology for

examining the error of the method is discussed in Chapter 7.

Student's f-test for unpaired values showed no statistically significant

differences for relapse between the groups, hence all the groups were combined

for analysis. These results are presented in Chapter 8.

The findings of this study are discussed in Chapters 10 and 11 and some

interesting results were noted.

Page 21: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

2't

.],.2 VERTICAL RAMUS OSTEOTOMY

The term "vertical subsigmoid osteotomy" is widely used in Australia to

describe a procedure for mandibular setback. This term, however, is not

commonly used in the literature. Consequently, surgery of the ramus of the

mandible in the vertical plane has resulted in a number of synonyms, derived

either from anatomical landmarks or from the direction of the osteotomy or a

combination of the two. Table 1.1 summarises the terms used to describe the

vertical subsigmoid osteotomy. There are only minor variations in all of these

procedures covered by this list. In this thesis the term "vertical subsigmoid

osteotomy" will be used exclusively.

Table L.1 Synonyms used to describe the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy

Oblique osteotomy

Vertical ramus osteotomy

Subcondylar osteotomy

Vertical subcondylotomy

Overlapping vertical osteotomy

Oblique osteotomy

Oblique sliding osteotomy

Vertical oblique osteotomy

Oblique sliding osteotomy

Vertical subcondylar osteotomy

Oblique subcondylar osteotomy

Transoral vertical ramus osteotomy

Vertical subsigmoid osteotomy

1925

7954

1958

1958

1959

7967

7967

19æ

1970

1970

1981

79tß

1988

Limberg

Caldwell & Letterman

Hinds

Robinson

Robinson

Thoma

Shira

Nordenham & Waller

Robinson

Hebert et al.

Egyedi et al.

Phillips et al.

Quinn & Wedell

SYNONI}ÎvfYEARAUTHOR

Page 22: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

22

II

REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

Page 23: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

23

CHAPTER 2

MANDIB ULAR PROGNATHI SM

2..]. DEFINITION

Historically, John Hunter in 7778 (Palmer, 1935) described mandibular

prognathism as being "the lower jaw projecting too far forwards so that the fore

teeth pass before those of the upper jaw, when the mouth is shut; which is

attended with inconvenience and disfigures the face". Hogeman (1951)

elaborated on this definition by describing mandibular prognathism as being

"the projection of the lower anterior teeth to a position in front of the upper

anterior teeth and concomitant anterior positioning of the mandible to cause

disfigurement of the facial profile when the teeth are in contact with the

articular condyles in the rest position within the articular fossa".

Joffe (1965) and Kelsey (1968) have similarly defined mandibular prognathism as

a disorder of craniofacial growth in which the facial profile is marred by an

undue prominence of the mandible. Horowitz et al. (7969) identified another

criteria and added that this deformity is characterised by an Angle Class III molar

and/or incisor relationship in which the lower molars or lower incisors are

further forward than normal.

2.2 CLASSIFICATION OF MANDIBULAR PROGNATHISM

Despite the various classifications available, the pathognomonic feature in all

cases of mandibular prognathism is that the lower incisors close in front of the

upper incisors. Although prognathic mandibles may look very much alike,

Page 24: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

24

several subgroups have been identified, each differing in aetiology and more

importantly in the treatment required.

Biederman (1967) classified mandibular prognathism into four categories:

1. Mandibular overgrowths which consist of two subgroups:

(a)

(b)

one in which the excessive growth is vertical; and

the other group in which the growth is horizontal.

3.

2. Maxillary undergrowths or insufficiencies.

False mandibular prognathisms where mandibular closure is achieved by

forward condylar translation.

4. Dental Class I, type 3 where there is no skeletal discrepancy and the first

molars are in Class I but the canines are in Class III with an edentulous

distal the canine

Sanborn, in L955, classified Class III malocclusions more comprehensively into

the following categories using facial profilograms (Figure 2.7) and reported that

45Vo of Class III cases had a normal maxilla and a prognathic mandible:

Group A: maxilla within normal range

mandible beyond the normal range

Group B: maxilla below normal range

mandible within the normal range

Page 25: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

25

Group C: maxilla within normal range

mandible within the normal range

Group D: maxilla below normal range

mandible beyond the normal range

Hirose et aI. (7976) added a fifth group to account for Asian profiles:

Group E: maxilla beyond normal range

mandible beyond the normal range

Page 26: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

26

Figure 2.1 Variations of skeletal pattern of Class III malocclusions

(modified from Hirose et al. 19Z6)

Group A Group B Group C Group D Group E

N,,

,,

It

t

I

J

.l

tat.

Ia

Ii

a

aI

!¡lr

a

Ia

I

4rr rY ì

\i A

B

Pascoe et al. (1960) included another group in which the madlla is normal; the

occlusion and alveolar process are also normal but the prognathic appearance

results from prominence of the mental protuberances. Jacobsen et al. (7974)

agreed with Sanborn that the most common feature of a Class III malocclusion

was prognathism of the mandible rather than a deficiency of the maxilla in the

anteroposterior dimension, found in 50% of his adult sample. Ellis and

McNamara (1984) divided Class III cases into those with and without anterior

open bite and found a retrognathic maxilla in 67Vo of cases. In summary, there

exists three entities which comprehensively defines mandibular prognathism:

Page 27: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

27

(i)

( ii)

(iii)

occlusal;

skeletal; and

postural.

Treatment for mandibular prognathism is dependent on a number of factors

which include:

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

degree of dentofacial deformity;

patient perception of the problem; and

treating clinician(s) perception of the problem

no treatment at all;

orthodontic camouflage;

surgery alone; and

surgery in combination with orthodontics

Treatment options available to correct mandibular prognathism include

(i)

(ii ¡

( iii)

(iv)

2.3 INCIDENCE OF MANDIBULAR PROGNATHISM

The literature on the incidence of mandibular prognathism is sparse although

an approximation can be gained by determining the incidence of Class III

malocclusions which typically reflects the size and shape of the mandible. Ag",

genetic and racial variations are primary determinants of Class III

malocclusions. Rarely is mandibular prognathism a problem of infancy. Its

onset is often apparent in the mixed dentition phase and true prognathism is

quite evident during and after puberty, the period of rapid growth. A recent

review by van Vuuren (1991) reported that the incidence of Class III

malocclusion varied usually between 1.To and 4.2% of the sample populations

Page 28: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

28

studied although a high incidence of Class III malocclusion was noted in a

review by Huber and Reynolds (1946) who reported an incidence of 72.2Vo. A

separate study by Rakosi and Schilli in 1981 reported that 787o of their study of

2000 pre-school children showed a Class III relationship in the primary dentition

which subsequently reduced to an incidence of 3Vo in the first phase of the

mixed dentition. Propensity for racial groups to manifest jaw deformities is not

uncommon. Nordenham and Waller (1968) reported that the most common

jaw deformity in Scandinavia was mandibular prognathism. More informative

reviews detail sample sizes and incidence of prognathism (Tables 2.'I.. and 2.2).

Page 29: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

29

Table 21 Prevalence of Class III malocclusions (facobsen et aI. 1974)

Table 2.2 Prevalence of Class III malocclusions (Lew et aI.1993)

4.2

1.35

1,2.2

4.0

2.7

2.2

7.2

9.4

2.97

7.6

18.0

American Caucasians

School children

Students

Swedes 21y.o.

Swedes 72y.o.

Caucasians-males

Caucasians-females

Children 14-18 y.o.

Children 7-15 y.o.

Children 15-18 y.o.

Preschool children

several thousand cases

4,770

500

737

474

not stated

not stated

2,759

2,956

1,473

2,000

7907

7925

7946

7946

7946

1951

1951

1951

7957

1965

1985

Angle (7907)

Ainsworth

Huber & Reynolds

Seipel

Seipel

IGogman

Krogman

Massler & Frankel

Goose et al.

Ast et al.

Rakosi

PREVALENCE

oF CLASS rtt (%)

ETHNIC GROUPSAMPLE SIZEYEARAUTHOR

5.5

10.0

4.0

4.0

8.7

16.8

11.0

33.0

29.0

70.6

12.6

American Caucasians

Eskimo

British

Swedish

American Blacks

Kikuyu Kenyan

Indian

Chinese

Malay

Egyptian

Chinese

718

100

1,000

301

445

s05

42

154

151

501

1,050

1970

1977

7974

7974

1985

1985

1989

7989

1989

7990

7993

Horowitz

Wood

Foster & Day

Ingervall

Garner & Butt

Garner & Butt

Woon et al.

Woon et al.

Woon et al.

El-Mangoury et al

Lew

PREVALENCE

OF CLASS III(%)

ETHNIC GROUPSAMPLE SIZEYEARAUTHOR

Page 30: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

2.4

30

SURGERY FOR THE TREATMENT OF MANDIBULAR PROGNATHISM

(Figure 2.2)

The first deliberate surgical intervention for the correction of an acquired jaw

defect was performed by Hultihen in 1849 to rectify an anterior open bite which

resulted from a burn contracture of the neck. Half a century passed before

Berger pioneered the surgical correction of prognathism in 1,897. Berger (1,897)

and Jaboulay and Berard (1898) first performed a bilateral condylectomy via a

preauricular approach to push the mandible back. The subcondylar osteotomy

was first described by Kostecka in 1928 in which the condylar neck was divided

with a Gigli saw by a blind external approach. This technique fell into disrepute

because of complications encountered. Intraoperatively, damage to the

maxillary artery was a serious problem with this technique because of its

position just medial to the condylar neck. Postoperatively, the occurrence of

salivary fistulae and facial paralysis was noted and anterior open bites often

resulted following release of maxillomandibular fixation. Smith and Johnson

(1940) described a minor modification of this operation which involved

removal of a section of bone from the region of the sigmoid notch to allow

posterior repositioning of the mandible. The horizontal ramus osteotomy

above the level of the inferior dental foramen via an external approach was

described by Blair (1907) and Babcock (1909) early this century. Later, this

osteotomy was performed intraorally by Aleman (1.92'I) and is sometimes

known as the Swedish approach. Obwegeser (7957) described the original sagittal

split procedure in which greater bone to bone contact is achieved and various

modifications of this operation are very popular today. The vertical subsigmoid

operation was first described by Caldwell and Letterman in 1954. Here the

ascending ramus is divided vertically from the sigmoid notch to a point just

anterior to the angle of the mandible. This may or may not be combined with

Page 31: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

31

coronoidotomy and was approached as an extraoral procedure. Trauner and

Obwegeser (7957) reported the logical extension of this procedure.

Figure 2.2 Surgical techniques performed in the vertical rami of mandible to

correct mandibular prognathism (modified from Alling, 1965)

a. Condylectomy

o

b. Subsigmoid notch osteotomy with sliding condylotomy

\

b

I

Page 32: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

32

c. Horizontal osteotomy

t

I

c

d. Subcondylar osteotomy

TI

e. Operations between rebomolar area and gonial angle

d

\ r-t

e

Page 33: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

33

f. Triangular oblique ostectomy

UI

ì'

g. Vertical osteotomy

h. Oblique sliding osteotomy

1

f

II

g

\tI,I

(

h

Page 34: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

34

With the introduction of the intraoral approach, extraoral scars could be

avoided. Winstanley in 1968 and Wilbanks in 7977 terrned this technique the

double oblique osteotomy. The name of the technique is derived from the fact

that the bone cut is oblique in two directions, that is, from the anterior region of

the sigmoid notch down to the gonial angle (a superior - inferior obliquity) and

simultaneously a biased cut from the lateral cortex to medial cortex (a lateral -

medial obliquity). In 7970, Hebert and associates reported the correction of

mandibular prognathism in seven patients via an intraoral approach using a

Stryker oscillating saw which allowed a cut to be made similar to the extraoral

technique. However, the method had disadvantages of poor visualisation and

difficulty in access. Massey et al. (1974) and others refined the case selection by

excluding patients whose mandibular morphology presented an access problem.

Their basis for selection of cases was to exclude mandibles that presented with

mandibular divergence angles less than L30o (Figure 2.3) as these were deemed

to introduce a high degree of difficulty (Akin and Walters,7975).

Figure 2.3 Mandibular divergence angle - submental vertex view

(modified from Massey, 19741

t58.5. t57.5.

Page 35: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

35

More recently, a new osteotomy, termed the intraoral vertico-sagittal ramus

osteotomy, has been introduced by Choung (7992) for the correction of

mandibular prognathism. The rationale behind this technique is an attempt to

decrease the incidence of condylar displacement by virtue that the osteotomy is

theoretically parallel to the plane in which the mandible is repositioned. It

claims to combine the advantages of both the vertical ramus osteotomy and the

sagittal split osteotomy as well as reducing the incidence of neurosensory

disturbances. Table 2.3 summarises the various surgical techniques which have

been used to treat mandibular prognathism.

Table 2.3 Historical review of surgery to treat mandibular prognathism

(modified from Hinds 1957)

Osteotomy in body of mandible

Bilateral ostectomy in body of mandible

Bilateral condylectomy

Ramus osteotomy for recessive mandible

Ramus osteotomy for prognathism

Ostectomy posterior to last molar with preservation

of nerve and artery

Subcondylar osteotomy for open bite

Subcondylar osteotomy for prognathism

Two stage bilateral ostectomy

Subsigmoid ostectomy

Vertical osteotomy

Intraoral subcondylar osteotomy

Inhaoral vertico-sagittal ramus osteotomy

1849

7897

1898

1905

1909

791,2

1928

7947

7944

1,954

7954

1968

7992

Hullihen

Blairjaboulay

Blair

Babcock

Harsha

Kostecka

Schaeffer

Dingman

Smith & Robinson

Caldwell & Letterman

Winstanley

Chounq

SURGICALTECHNIQUEYEARAUTHOR

The technique used in this study was that of Winstanley (1968)

Page 36: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

36

2.5 COMPLICATIONS OF VERTICAL SUBSIGMOID OSTEOTOMY

Although the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy is now perceived to produce a low

rate of complications and these are considered to be only minor in nature (Van

Merkesteyn et al. '1,987; Wang and Waite, 7975) some complications associated

with any surgical procedure are inevitable. It must be remembered that there is

a learning curve for individual surgeons. Modification, refinement of the

technique and improved instrumentation have popularised the vertical

subsigmoid osteotomy and minimised the complications since its inception in

7954 by Caldwell and Letterman. Van Merkesteyn et al. (1987) highlighted the

various complications that can occur and reported the incidence of

complications with the use of the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy to be low

(1,7.8%) when compared with the sagittal split osteotomy (25.8%) (Tabte 2.4).

Table 24 Percentage of complications with mandibular surgery

11.8

25.8

Vertical subsigmoid osteotomy

Sagittal split osteotomy

% OF COMPLICATIONSSURGICAL TECHNIOI.'E

Tornes (1987) reviewed and compared the perioperative and postoperative

complications between the intraoral and the extraoral technique of vertical

subsigmoid osteotomy of the mandible. Although both techniques were

considered to be safe and satisfactory, the extraoral approach was favoured

because it resulted in less operative time, less blood loss, less swelling and a

significantly shorter stay in hospital.

Page 37: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

37

Review of the literature suggests a number of technical and biological problems.

The reported complications known include:

Intraoperative complications

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

(a)

(a)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

Immediate postoperative complications

(a) neurosensory deficit involving the inferior alveolar nerve;

(b) postoperative infection; and

(c) sequestration of the proximal segment.

Delayed postoperative complications

haemorrhage at the time of surgery;

inadvertent bone cut and incomplete bone sectioning;

displacement of the proximal segment;

inability to set the mandible back;

condylar dislocation; and

herniation of the buccal fat pad.

anterior or lateral open bite;

reduced mouth opening i.e. residual trismus;

temporomandibular joint dysfunction;

ankylosis of the coronoid process to the zygomatic arch;

Frey's syndrome; and

Eagle like syndrome.

Further complications are encountered when the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy

is performed via an extraoral approach and these include:

Page 38: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

38

Complications associated with extraoral approach

(a)

þ)

(c)

facial nerve palsy - marginal mandibular branch;

keloid scarring; and

parotid fistula.

2.5.1. Intraoperative complications

(a) Haemorrhage at the time of surgery

Haemorrhage associated with mandibular osteotomies, especially to the extent

that it becomes life threatening is a rare occurrence and its risk is less than that

following maxillary surgery. Lanigan et al. (1991) provided a comprehensive

review of haemorrhage and its management following mandibular surgery.

The two vessels commonly involved in intraoperative bleeding during the

vertical subsigmoid osteotomy are the inferior alveolar artery and the maxillary

artery. Bleeding from the inferior alveolar artery with its concomitant

neurosensory involvement is not considered to be problematic as this vessel is

more accessible to ligation or cauterisation. However, laceration of the

maxillary artery can be quite a serious event with a rapid amount of blood loss

in a very short period of time. The difficulties arise because of the blind

approach in performing this technique. Tuinzing and Greebe (1985) reported a

series of three cases out of 150 in which bleeding from the maxillary artery

occurred. Astrand et al. (7973) detailed profuse bleeding intraoperatively from

the cancellous bone in 11 of 55 patients undergoing vertical subsigmoid

osteotomy. These were controlled with compression. To the more extreme,

Quinn and Wedell (1988) reported problematic haemorrhage in a case which

necessitated ligation of an unspecified branch of the external carotid artery.

Other vessels may be involved and include the buccal artery which may be cut at

the time of incision and may not present any problems until the vasoconstrictor

Page 39: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

39

effects of the local anaesthetic solutions have been expended. Generally, this

procedure can be performed safely with minimal bleeding (Akin and Walters,

797s).

ft) Inadvertent bone cut

Very little literature is available on the problem of placing the osteotomy cut in

the wrong position. Van Merkesteyn et al. (7987) reported one case of an

erroneous bone cut. Anecdotal experience particularly from teaching Units

where trainees are involved in the surgery indicate that aberrant osteotomy cuts

are not uncommon. The reason for aberrant placement of the osteotomy cut

may be due to incorrect positioning of the Le Vasseur Merrill retractor. If the

retractor is allowed to "sag" an osteotomy cut is placed very close to the posterior

border of the mandible resulting in a very narrow proximal segment. If the

"Iedge" on the retractor is not utilised (ie. the saw is not resting on the ledge),

then a very wide proximal fragment may result with possible damage to the

inferior alveolar neurovascular bundle.

(c) Displacement of the proximal segment

Incorrect position of the proximal segment has been reported by Hall et al.

(1975). Correction was necessary in one patient. In the series by Van Merkesteyn

(7987) displacement of the proximal segment occurred in three sites, two of

which were surgically repositioned. Medial displacement of the segment has

been reported to occur in about 3Vo to 8Vo of cases according to various authors

(Tuinzing et al. 1983; Tuinzing and Greebe,1985; Rosenquist, 1990).

(d) Inability to set the mandible back

Difficulties in retropositioning the mandible using the oblique sliding

osteotomy due to the sfrength of the masticatory muscles has been reported by

Willmar et al. (1.979). These authors favoured the sagittal split osteotomy since

Page 40: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

40

extensive stripping of muscle aids in mobilisation of the segments. Flowever,

Johanson et al. (7979), indicated that this problem can be easily overcome by

careful dissection of the insertions of the pterygoid and masseter muscles on the

proximal fragment. Furthermore, this method has been used to correct

prognathism with even as much setback as 21 mm.

The coronoid process is thought to restrict the posterior movement of the distal

segment of the mandible as it is rotated anteriorly in open bite cases. It also

impinges on the condylar process as the mandible is set back, therefore, it is

sometimes considered desirable to section the coronoid process during the

vertical subsigmoid procedure in order to facilitate repositioning of the bone

fragments. This is especially so in more severe cases of prognathism and

anterior open bite (Hinds and Kent, 1972).

Difficulty in setting the mandible back may be due to other bony hindrances.

Braun and Sotereanos (1983) reported a case in which a right styloidectomy was

necessary to complete a mandibular setback following vertical subsigmoid

osteotomy. It has also been suggested that the configuration of the medial aspect

of the mandible may be a hindrance in performing larger mandibular setbacks

and this can be overcome by making the cut more oblique (Tuinzing and

Greebe, 1985).

(e) Condylar dislocation

Macintosh (1981) stated that "the two potential difficulties of most lasting

significance in the sagittal split osteotomy are improper condylar positioning

and improper application of the fixation wires". Undoubtedly, the same

principles apply to any osteotomy of the mandible. Freihofer (7976)

recommended that intraoperative radiographs be taken to ensure the correct

positioning of the condyle and although theoretically it has merit, in practice

Page 41: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

41.

this is difficult. Mechanical aids have been described to assist in stabilisation of

the condyles (Leonard, 7976; Zecha et al. 7978) but the technique of vertical

subsigmoid osteotomy does not lend itself to these devices. Quinn and Wedell

(1988) reported one case of condylar dislocation with consequent ankylosis of the

condylar head anterior to the articular fossa. Subsequently, avascular necrosis

resulted necessitating total temporomandibular joint replacement.

In one unreported case in the South Australian Unit, a trainee of the Unit

inadvertently dislocated the proximal segment anteriorly on one side (Figure

2.4). This required a second operation to reposition the fragment via a

preauricular approach.

Figure 2.4 Panoramic radiograph showing anterior dislocation of the right

mandibular condyle

Page 42: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

42

2.5.2 Immediate postoperative complications

(a) Neurosensory deficit involving the inferior alveolar nerve

Neurosensory changes to the inferior alveolar nerve have been reported and are

likely to occur in most types of operations of the mandible, however the

incidence of these changes are variable. These injuries are particularly common

in operations which utilise the intraoral sagittal split osteotomy (Table 2.5).

Table 25 Incidence of neurosensory deficit - sagittal split osteotomy

of the mandible

Neurosensory changes are also frequent for the horizontal osteotomy of the

mandible (Table 2.6).

Table 2.6 Incidence of neurosensory deficit - horizontal osteotomy

of the mandible

76Vo

44Vo

677o

37Vo

87o

7965

7969

7978

1986

7997

Kohle

White, Peters, Costlich & Page

Pepersack & Chausse

Coughlan & Irvine

Læira & Gilhuus-Moe

INCIDENCE OF NEI.'ROSENSORY DEFICITYEARAUTHOR

38Vo

757o

55%

1951

7962

19æ

Hogeman

Fromm, Nordh & Nordstrom

Nordenham & Waller

INCIDENCE OF NEUROSENSORY DEFICITYEARAUTHOR

Page 43: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

43

The intraoral vertical subsigmoid osteotomy probably carries the lowest risk of

inferior alveolar nerve injury for ramus procedures. Although the operation is

performed blind, the position of the neurovascular bundle is determined by

locating the antilingula, a very slight rounded prominence on the lateral side of

the ramus of the mandible (Caldwell and Letterman, 79il), and then performing

the osteotomy behind this landmark. Identification of the antilingula does not

ensure the prevention of damage to the inferior alveolar nerve. Yates et al.

(1976) investigated the reliability of the antilingula as an anatomic landmark

during oral and maxillofacial surgery. They found a high variability in its

position. The antilingula was situated considerably more anterior and superior

to the inferior alveolar foramen. It was suggested that if the osteotomy cut was

made 5-10 mm distal to this landmark and only if this landmark was found

(antilingula present in <50% of dried mandibles), then the inferior alveolar

nerve would be spared during operation.

Wang and Waite (1.975) considered paraesthesia to be a rare complication.

Massey et al. (1974) reported no cases of permanent paraesthesia or anaesthesia

in his study of 'l..4 patients. Akin and Walter ('1,975) demonstrated minimal

numbers with only two cases of nerve injury in their series of 38 patients, one

which was severed at the time of operation and the other case arising

consequent to medial displacement of the proximal fragment. Zaytoun et al.

(1986) compared the long term neurosensory deficit following intraoral vertical

subsigmoid osteotomy and the sagittal split osteotomy and found that in the

study of 26 patients, an incidence of 28.87o of neuropathy of the mental nerve

occurred. All incidences were associated with the sagittal split osteomy and

none involved the intraoral vertical subsigmoid osteotomy. This highlights the

point that the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy produces less nerve morbidity.

Hall et al. (7975) also experienced medial displacement of the proximal fragment

causing neurosensory problems and hence identified another factor to be the

Page 44: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

M

close proimity of the bone cut to the mandibular canal. Astrand et al. (7973)

also reported only two cases of transient paraesthesia (3.6V") with full recovery

whereas Rakosi and Schilli (1981) reported an unusually high incidence of

neurosensory changes (637o). Hall and McKenna (7987), in refining the surgical

technique of intraoral vertical subsigmoid osteotomy by extending the inferior

portion of the cut anteriorly to improve the vascular supply to this region,

reported acute nerve damage to an incidence of 36Vo of operated sides of which

747o recovered fully within one year.

(b) Postoperative infection

Hinds and Kent (7972) reported the possibitity of postoperative infection but this

complication is rarely seen since the institution of sterile techniques (1890) and

prophylactic antibiotics (1950). Hogevold et al. (7997) demonstrated in their

study that over a 50 year period of performing mandibular osteotomies,

fluctuations in the frequency of postoperative infections were evident. A cause-

effect relationship could not be determined for these infections. Flowever,

plausible explanations included the patients being warded in the same hospital

unit as the urology patients, no prophylactic antibiotics being used and salivary

contamination of the operative field (surgery performed by an extraoral

approach).

(c) Necrosis of the proximal segment

Necrosis of the proximal segment has been documented by Shepherd (1980).

Prolonged fixation without loading, coupled with decreased blood flow

contributed to the degeneration. Quinn and Wedell (1988) experienced two

cases of avascular necrosis necessitating total prosthetic replacement of the

temporomandibular joint. Hall et al. (7975) reported on necrosis of the distal tip

of the proximal segment and suggested several factors may be involved. Firstly,

they noted that very little tissue acted as a pedicle for blood supply to the

Page 45: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

45

Proximal fragment. This was confirmed by Bell et al. (7974), using animal

studies, hence the necrosis results as a consequence of ischaemia. Hall et al.

(7975) offered an alternative explanation for necrosis. They postulated that

necrosis resulted from bacterial contamination from the intraoral incision

overwhelming the marginal blood supply. The bacterial contamination

produced osteomyelitis and subsequent necrosis. The pedicle for blood supply to

the proximal fragment does not differ from the sagittal split osteotomy

(Grammer et al. 1974). Secondly, necrosis of the distal tip only occurred in those

patients with long proximal segments. This complication may be prevented by

cutting off the most distal and presumably the most ischaemic part of the

proximal segment (Hall et aL.7975).

2.5.3 Delayed postoperative complications

(a) Anterior or lateral open bite

Postoperative open bite following vertical subsigmoid osteotomy has been

recorded and to some extent is to be expected. Baumrind et al. (1,974) found that

the tendency to open bite in their series of 22 patients surgically treated to correct

mandibular prognathism proved to be of lesser magnitude than had been

anticipated. The incidence of postoperative bite opening has been variable.

Hinds (1958) and Nordenham and Waller (1,968) found no opening of the bite in

their stud/, whereas Astrand and Ridell (1973) found minimal bite opening.

Robinson (1959) suggested that a posterior open bite should be planned to

compensate for the anterior open bite. Hall et al. (7975) also experienced six

cases of anterior open bite in their series of 42 patients. They concluded that the

reason for the anterior open bite may at least be partially related to condylar sag

since it occurred about twice as often in patients without firm wire fixation of

the condylar segments.

Page 46: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

46

(b) Reduced mouth opening

Decrease in function immediately following any operation of the mandible is

inevitable usually as a result of pain, psychological concerns of the operation

and muscle guarding. An initial reduction in mouth opening is not

uncommon after maxillomandibular fixation. Astrand et al. (7973)

demonstrated that, in a few cases, the maximum opening at six months was

only 20 mm but normal opening was regained within two and half years.

Edlund et al. (1979) confirmed that the maximum opening of the mouth

decreased following operation and in their study an average of 10 mm reduction

was noted although masticatory efficiency was not adversely affected. Stacy

(7987) showed that the maximum mouth opening recovered to presurgical

limits without the use of mechanical devices and this was achieved within nine

months following release of maxillomandibular fixation. The effect of physical

rehabilitation on mandibular function after ramus osteotomy was assessed by

Storum and Bell (1986). The results indicated that function was not altered after

vertical sigmoid osteotomy whereas sagittal split osteotomies resulted in

reduction of mandibular opening and bite force. This was corrected with

physical rehabilitation.

Masticatory function was studied by Shiratsuchi et al. (7997) with elaborate

techniques consisting of measuring the use of adenosine triphosphate granules

(ATP) by means of a spectrophotometer, measuring the bite force and the

amount of occlusal contact. The findings were that masticatory function tended

to improve gradually postoperatively although masticatory efficiency was still

judged to be inferior to those with normal occlusion even 12 months after

operation.

Page 47: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

47

(c) Temporomandibular joint dysfunction

Surgical correction of prognathism will undoubtedly improve both the

occlusion and the profile but adverse effects on the temporomandibular joint

may result as a consequence to this correction. Astrand et al. (7973) reported that

most patients had tenderness and discomfort in the region of the joint in the

initial period after release of maxillomandibular fixation but these symptoms

subsided. At the six month follow-up, seven of 55 patients still experienced

temporomandibular joint problems. Five patients were treated successfully

with occlusal equilibration or bite splints and the remaining two patients had

symptoms prior to operation. Hogeman (1951) presented his findings of

temporomandibular joint symptoms in 2'1..2 7o of cases and found the frequency

higher among those patients that had been followed up for longer periods of

time. In contrast to temporomandibular joint symptoms developing after

correction of prognathic mandibles by vertical subsigmoid osteotomy, this

procedure has been historically used and still is being used for the treatment of

symptomatic internal derangements of the temporomandibular joint (Hall et al.

7993; Bell et al.7990; Nickerson and Veaco,7989).

(d) Ankylosis of the coronoid process to the zygomatic arch

Troyer (7977) reported a case of ankylosis in which the temporomandibular joint

was immobilized subsequent to surgical correction of mandibular prognathism.

The ankylosis of the coronoid process to the zygomatic arch resulted following a

coronoidotomy being performed concurrently with the vertical subsigmoid

osteotomy.

(e) Fre/s syndrome

Frey's slmdrome, also known as gustatory sweating, may result following any of

the surgical procedures to the ascending ramus of the mandible as the nerve

involved in this complication, the auriculotemporal nerve, may be damaged as

Page 48: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

48

it passes posterior to the neck of the condyle. Following damage to the

auriculotemporal nerve, its component parasympathetic fibres reanastamose to

innervate the sweat glands instead of the salivary glands. This would lead to

gustatory sweating in the temporal and auricular regions triggered by appetising

food (Hinds and Kent, 7972). This syndrome has also been observed in patients

treated with horizontal osteotomy of the ascending ramus of the mandible

(Hogeman,7957).

(Ð Eagle like syndrome

Eagle's syndrome is characterised by pain laterally in the throat with radiation to

the ear and along the mandible. It is due to an elongated styloid process. There

is also commonly a sensation of a foreign body in the throat which necessitates

frequent swallowing. A case of Eagle's syndrome following mandibular setback

has been reported by Tuinzing et al. (1983). The treatment recommended for

patients with Eagle's syndrome consists of fracturing the styloid process and

removing it (Glogoff et al. 1981).

2.5.4 Complications associated with extraoral approach

(a) Facial nerve palsy

Last (1978) described the facial nerve, the seventh cranial nerve, as two roots (a

motor root and a small sensory root) emerging from the anterior surface of the

hindbrain between the pons and medulla oblongata. It then passes into the

acoustic meatus with the vestibulocochlear nerve. Thereafter, it enters the facial

canal, expands into the geniculate ganglion and turns sharply backwards to run

posteriorly and then inferiorly across the medial wall of the middle ear cavity. It

emerges from the base of the skull at the stylomastoid foramen. Before the

facial nerve exits from the stylomastoid foramen, it gives off three important

branches; the greater superficial petrosal nerve, the nerve to stapedius and the

Page 49: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

49

chorda tympani nerve. These nerves supply secretomotor fibres to the lacrimal

gland, motor fibres to the stapedius muscle and taste fibres to the anterior two

thirds of the tongue respectively. After it emerges from the stylomastoid

foramen, the facial nerve gives off the posterior auricular nerve which supplies

the occipital belly of the occipitofrontalis muscle. A muscular branch is next

given off and this supplies the posterior belly of the digastric and stylohyoid

muscles. The facial nerve then divides and rejoins to form a plexiform

arrangement known as the pes anserinus before it finally divides into the five

main branches which supply motor function to the muscles of facial expression.

The five branches are:

(i)

(ii)

(iii )

(iv)

(v)

temporal branch;

zygomattc branch;

buccal branch;

marginal mandibular branch; and

cervical branch.

Intraoral surgical methods carry only a negligible risk of facial nerve injury as

the nerve is positioned well lateral to the operative site (Behrman, 1972; Kohle,

1965). Damage to the facial nerve is a known complication of the vertical

subsigmoid osteotomy when performed via an extraoral approach as the

dissection must pass the nerve to reach the mandible. The marginal

mandibular branch of the facial nerve is the nerve most commonly

encountered when the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy is performed by an

extraoral approach. Astrand et al. (1973) reported injury to the mandibular

branch of the facial nerve in one patient in a study of 55 patients and this

resulted in partial paralysis which spontaneously resolved after two months.

Martis (1984) suggested that facial nerve paresis may occur indirectly following

posterior repositioning of the distal segment in mandibular setback procedures

Page 50: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

50

and is due to pressure on the nerve trunk by the posterior border of the distal

segment. When the osteotomy is performed via an extraoral approach, the

marginal mandibular branch of the facial nerve is at risk of being damaged.

Hogevold et al. (7997) reviewed 898 orthognathic surgical cases presenting with

mandibular prognathism and/or asymmetry since 7939. In all cases mandibular

surgery was performed extraorally and a high incidence of temporary facial

nerve palsies was found, numbering 15 patients in all, with one patient

experiencing permanent postoperative paresis.

þ) Scar formation

For the extraoral approach, the scar is usually inconspicuous, but does occur.

For some patients who are predisposed to adverse healing, hypertrophic scarring

or keloids may form and it is in these patients that skin incisions should be

avoided particularly in certain racial groups e.g. Negroes. The refinement of the

intraoral technique obviates the need for any skin incisions.

(c) Parotid fistula

Postoperatively, the occurrence of salivary fistulae was noted with the Kostecka

(1928) procedure of high and blind condylotomy. This may be a possibility

whenever surgery is performed in the region of the parotid gland or duct and

glandular tissue is accidentally damaged.

Hogevold et al. (7997) detailed their experience with 31 cases of saliva retention

over 14 years following extraoral ramus osteotomy in 280 patients. They

reported that routine treatment for this complication consisted of repeated

aspiration and radiation with doses of 4.00 Gray daily for three days to the

parotid gland to reduce saliva production for 3-4 months.

Page 51: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

51

CHAPTER 3

RELAPSE FOLLOWING MANDIBULAR SURGERY

3.1 DEFINING POSTSURGICAL RELAPSE

Reitzik (1988) defined relapse as being the tendency to "return to the

preoperative position". Long term stability of mandibular orthognathic surgery

is complicated by relapse. Reitzik (1988) divided relapse into three categories,

each with its own anatomy, pathophysiology and time period. Firstly,

immediate relapse occurs upon release of maxillomandibular fixation and is

due to the malposition of the mandibular condyles or condylar sag induced at

the time of surgery. He emphasised that this only occurs when the proximal

fragment is secured to the distal fragment and only when maxillomandibular

fixation is used.

The second type of relapse is long term relapse due to interfragmentary

instability. The third type of relapse results from a flexural drift causing a

change in the shape of the mandible. Reitzik (1988), in his summary, reported

that stability is primarily determined by the degree of interfragmentary stability

or instability and the best parameter to measure this is the gonial angle. This

angle will increase if the distal fragment rotates clockwise (lateral head

cephalogram facing to the right) and/or the proximal segment rotates

anticlockwise.

Whether an extraoral or intraoral approach is undertaken, the vertical

subsigmoid osteotomy has established itself as a safe technique with a reasonably

predictable result although some relapse after removal of fixation must be

Page 52: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

52

anticipated. Franco et al. (1989) defined relapse as "forward movement of

pogonion during the postoperative period".

Petersson and Willmar-Hogeman (1989) defined relapse as "postoperative

displacement of the mandible". Their assessment of movement was made

easier by the use of a tantalum pin being inserted into the midline of the

mandible using the method of Björk (1955).

Michiwaki et al. (1990) arbitrarily defined skeletal relapse as the postural change

of the cephalometric point "gnathion" between the time immediately after

surgery (within seven days) and at some time more than one year later.

Paulus (cited by Lindorf, '1,986) considered relapse to be present whenever

changes in the occlusion (..g. such as open bite), occurred during the

postoperative period. Although these definitions describe changes at the

occlusal level, Reitzik (1988) interpreted relapse to mean "a return to the

preoperative state". This broader definition encompasses skeletal and occlusal

changes, but to further define this statement, the horizontal shift of point B

toward the preoperative state will be used throughout this study to assess

relapse.

Surgical setback of the mandible for correction of prognathism varies in amount

from study to study. Reported measurements for mandibular setback have been

in the range of 3 mm to 10 mm (Table 3.1).

Page 53: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

53

Table 3.L Amount of mandibular setback and landmarks used for

measurements

Pogonion

Gonion

Gonion

Gonion

Pogonion

Point B

Gonion

Point B

Gonion

1,0.2

9.1

5.1

8.96

8.4

8.4

2.4

6.6nn

1981

7990

1990

7979

1986

7990

1990

1997

1980

Egyedi et al.

Allen & Rosenquist

Greece et al.

Johanson et al.

Kobayashi et al.

Lew et al.

Michiwaki et al.

Proffit et al.

Reitzik

LANDMARK

USED

AVERAGE MANDIBULAR

SE-IBACK (mm)

YEARAUTHOR

Reports have shown either no correlation or only weak correlation between the

amount of surgical setback and postoperative relapse (Astrand and Ridell,7973;

Johanson et al. 1,979; Rosenquist et aL. 7986; Pepersack and Chausse, 7978).

Contrary studies have found that the magnitude of mandibular setback does

have a bearing on relapse potential (Kobayashi,7986; Reitzik, 1980a).

3.2 MEASUREMENT OF POSTSURGICAL RELAPSE

Comparisons and measurement of relapse is arbitrary and variable depending

on the method of assessment. The literature is replete with a variety of

methods of presenting statistics on relapse. There is a need to consider

orthodontic and occlusal movements as well as skeletal movements when

measuring relapse. Some studies emphasise relapse in terms of occlusal

changes (Freihofer and Petresevic, 1,975; Pepersack and Chausse, 1,978;

Macintosh, 1,987; Lello, 7987) whereas others represent the changes in

cephalometric detail (Poulton et aL.1979; Lake et al. 1981; Van Sickels et al. 1988).

Page 54: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

il

Macintosh (1981), although favouring the assessment of relapse by the clinical

method of measuring changes in occlusion, found that cast analysis was difficult

and therefore eventually abandoned this type of study.

Relapse may be studied on both cephalometric radiographs or on dental casts

$ohanson et al. 7979). Early longitudinal studies have reported a relapse in the

horizontal direction ranging from 2-3 mm whereas the positional changes in

vertical direction have been less pronounced (Astrand and Ridell, 1,973).

Inconsistencies in the method of studying relapse makes comparisons with

other investigations difficult. Poulton and Ware (1973) and Huang and Ross

(7982) measured mandibular changes from articulare to gnathion. The resultant

effect of this type of measurement pertains to the combining of horizontal and

vertical changes and reporting them as one set of data. Hence one needs to

measure relapse in both axes as well as in detailed vector and rotational changes

as opposed to collated relapse changes.

One of the problems encountered when using cephalometry to locate and

identify dental landmarks is in the location of the hinge axis (Worms et al.

1980), especially when a splint is removed and rotation of the mandible is

necessary in order that complete intercuspation occurs. Commonly, the rotation

of the mandible occurs from a fixed axis of rotation at the centre of the condyle.

Flowever, Grant (1,973) has shown that the use of an instantaneous centre of

rotation is more akin to the natural kinematics of the mandible. The

significance of this changing centre of rotation is in the interpretation of

cephalometric studies that utilise an arbitrary centre of rotation. Data

interpretation may be misleading in that using an arc of rotation scribed with its

origin at the centre of the condyle may be incorrect. On the contrary, use of the

instantaneous centre of rotation may reveal that the closure of the mandible is

directed vectorially in a different pattern. The implication of this in

Page 55: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

55

cephalometry is that relapse of mandibular setbacks may be overestimated. This

is especially the case if rotation of the mandible following removal of a splint is

directed in a more vertical vector rather than a horizontal vector when using

the instantaneous centre of rotation as opposed to using a fixed arc. Fixed arc,

more often than not, has a greater horizontal or "x" vector, implying greater

relapse.

Some authors prefer to measure relapse specifically by using single landmarks

only. Proffit et al. (1997) analysed their results of mandibular setback and

reported on the changes of chin position only, whereby the intraoral vertical

subsigmoid osteotomy was found to be more stable than the bilateral sagittal

split osteotomy. They cited muscular and condylar influences in concluding

this outcome. This, however, is a simplistic approach to a complicated analysis.

Lake et al. (1981) used 15 cephalometric variables to assess dentoskeletal relapse.

Sandor et al. (1,984) used a simpler method of analysis consisting of horizontal

mandibular advancement, horizontal incisal tip advancement and increased

mandibular length. Reitzik (1988) measured relapse by assessing the skeletal

changes in each of the fragments and relative to each other. This method

presents problems in that the surgical technique employed must result in

minimal remodelling and minimal resorptive changes of the landmarks used,

otherwise longitudinal comparisons are invalidated. This is the case with the

vertical subsigmoid osteotomy technique where extensive resorption occurs in

the lower portion of the proximal fragment.

The timing of relapse has been divided into a number of phases based on the

release of maxillomandibular fixation which also represents the time of

physiological bone repair (Spiessel, 1974). Generally speaking, early,

intermediate and late relapse are the designated phases where significant

changes would be expected. Many authors have their own interpretation of

Page 56: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

56

these phases. Kraal and Valk (1981) considered these phases relative to

maxillomandibular fixation, ie. during maxillomandibular fixation, within a

few months of release of fixation and a considerable time after surgery. Sesenna

and Raffaini (1985) added an additional stage, that being at the moment of

release of maxillomandibular fixation. Other authors (McNeill et al. 7973; Ive et

aL.7977; Schendel and Epker,7980; Van Sickels et al. 1988) identified early relapse

to be within the first two months of surgery prior to release of

maxillomandibular fixation. The intermediate period covers the next four

months and long term relapse occurs after six months.

This study interprets relapse in the same manner as used in a thesis published

by Hing (1989) in which early relapse is designated as the period prior to release

of fixation and the intermediate phase being arbitrarily assigned to the period

from 2 to 72 months. Long term changes are noted after 72 months at which

time postsurgical orthodontics should have been completed. Relapse values,

relative to the constructed line seven degrees below Sella-Nasion with its origin

at Sella, are assigned a negative value throughout the text, whether in the

horizontal or vertical vectors. This would mean that mandibular setback and

upward movements of any designated points are assigned negative values.

3.3 EARLY,INTERMEDIATE AND LONG TERM RELAPSE

Skeletal stability following surgical manipulation of the mandible, whether

advancement or setback, has been well documented and the spectrum of

stability has been diverse (Schendel and Epker, 1980). It has been suggested that

most of the relapse occurs during or immediately following release of

maxillomandibular fixation (McNeill, 1973; Rosenquist et al. 1985). The

immediate postoperative condylar ascending ramus position and the tension of

the paramandibular connective tissues are important aetiological factors

Page 57: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

57

dictating skeletal stability. The paramandibular connective tissues include skin,

interstitial connective tissues, periosteum and muscles attached to and

surrounding the mandible (Wessberg and Epker, 1981).

Epker and Wessberg (1982) elaborated on the effects of postoperative condylar

ascending ramus position and the tension of the paramandibular connective

tissues in mandibular advancements and these factors could easily be applied to

mandibular setback procedures. As is the case with condylar distraction causing

relapse in mandibular advancements following release of maxillomandibular

fixation, forced posterior seating of the condyles could have a similar effect in

mandibular setback procedures. This skeletal relapse occurs because a

discrepancy is created between the functional occlusal position and the terminal

hinge position.

In reviewing the influence of muscles on relapse, Wessberg and Epker (1981)

showed that suprahyoid muscles alone do not significantly affect skeletal

stability when the mandible is advanced, especially when less than 30 per cent of

the muscle length is stretched. So it is thought that the musculature acts as only

one component of the paramandibular connective tissues in concert with the

skin, interstitial connective tissues and enveloping periosteum to exert a

relapsing force on the surgically positioned mandible (Solow and Kreiborg,

ßn).

Animal studies by Goldspink et aI. (7976) and McNamara (7979) supported the

concept of the paramandibular tissues playing a key role in skeletal relapse and

specifically implicated the periosteum as the primary aetiological factor. As a

result of these findings, it has been recommended that the periosteum at the

osteotomy site be incised to reduce the tension on the bony segments. Berman

and Behram (1978) suggested that skeletal stabilisation be maintained longer

Page 58: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

58

than the traditional six weeks to alleviate the relapsing potential of the

paramandibular tissues. According to McNamara (7979), skeletal stabilisation of

12 weeks maintains the desired osseous relationships while the connective

tissues adapt to their new environment.

Some authors (Pepersack and Chausse, 7978; Astrand and RideII, 1.973) have

postulated that the cause of relapse in some of the surgical cases may relate to a

failure of the musculature to adapt to the new form created by surgery. It was

suggested that electromyographic studies would be an aid in assessing whether a

reduction of mandibular length would result in a change in muscle activity and

whether the pattern of muscle activity would be associated with relapse. Moss

(1990) undertook this investigation and found changes in the pattern of muscle

activity before and after surgery. He postulated that patients who do not show

an increase in activity of the anterior temporal and posterior masseter muscles

at the end of the post retention period would tend to relapse. The

accommodation of the tongue in the space available was also an important

determinant of whether or not relapse would occur.

Epker and Wessberg (1.982) detailed the clinical applications of the

biomechanical and biological principles mentioned above in minimising

relapse of mandibular advancements and specified that prolonged skeletal

stabilisation (up to 1.2 weeks) with control of the proximal segment of the

mandible is advocated to ensure stable and predictable results. The principles

advocated were used in the context of mandibular advancements and therefore

applying these same principles to mandibular setback procedures would be

inappropriate.

Degeneration of the mandibular condyles following mandibular ramus surgery

in children or adults is rare but can also contribute to relapse. This type of

Page 59: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

59

relapse masks the changes that normally occur at the osteotomy site. This

phenomenon has resulted from avascular necrosis, degenerative arthritis or

condylysis (Phillips and Bell, 1,978; Weinberg and Craft, 1980).

There is controversy in the literature regarding the concept of solely using

dental fixation to control skeletal stability. The dentition can be bodity

repositioned within the alveolar process and as such relapse following an

operation could be masked by compensatory changes in axial inclinations of the

teeth (McNeill et al. 7973; Ive et al. 7977; Schendel and Epker, 1980).

Consequently, skeletal fixation has been trialed and its effects have been

compared to studies utilising dental fixation only with inconclusive results

(Rosenquist, 1985; Stella et al. 1986). Johanson et al. (7979) reported in a study of

112 patients, that even though relapse was greatest in the first six months, it was

observed during the whole control period. He suggested that positional changes

during the first year might be due to muscular forces during the healing of the

osteotomy. The relapse occurring after this period might be explained by the

development of new intercuspal relationships. Grinding of teeth

postoperatively may facilitate sliding into an anterior position. Kobayashi et al.

(1986) and Kahnberg and Ridell (1988) also confirmed and supported the idea

that the major part of relapse occurs within the first six months following

surgery and minimal relapse occurs thereafter (Johanson,1,979). Johanson et al.

(1979) reported that relapse is so minimal after two and a half years that clinical

follow-up after that period does not seem to be necessary. However, many

authors (Astrand and Ridell, 1.973; Johanson et al. 7989; Rosenquist et al. 1,987)

have suggested that long term stability should be carefully observed as

displacement of the distal segment has been found as late as two to two and a

half years after surgery, although this decreases with time.

Page 60: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

60

CHAPTER 4

FACTORS ASSOCIATED WITH POSTSURGICAL RELAPSE FOLLOWING

VERTICAL SUBSIGMOID OSTEOTOIVTY

4.1. INTRODUCTION

Treatment of mandibular prognathism now entails a multidisciplinary

approach using the combined skills of the Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeon,

Orthodontist and Speech Pathologist. The role of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery

and Orthodontics in the treatment of facial deformities is well known. The role

of the Speech Pathologist is to assess, diagnose and treat problems associated

with the voice, fluency, speech, language, eating and swallowing disorders. The

Speech Pathologist has been integrated into the overall treatment planning to

assess and determine the functional status of the orofacial musculature and to

determine the potential effects, both positive and negative, on orofacial function

after orthodontic treatment and orthognathic surgery alone or in combination.

The role of the Speech Pathologist is also to determine if there are any effects on

dental and skeletal relapse. Reliability of surgical procedures in association with

a combined approach has yielded quite good results with few complications.

However, despite these advances, long term results of treatment are not yet

uniformly satisfactory. The current main factor contributing to success is

dependent on the postoperative stability of the maxillomandibular structures.

While early studies reported minimal relapse following vertical or oblique

sliding osteotomy (Caldwell and Letterman, 7954; Nordenham and Waller, 1,968;

Hinds and Kent, 7972) subsequent publications showed a higher incidence of

relapse (Astrand et al. 'J,973; Astrand and Ridell, '1,973; Hall et aL. 1975; Isaacson et

aL.7978; Johanson et aL.7979; Egyedi et al. 1981). Most of the relapse is thought to

Page 61: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

67

occur after release of maxillomandibular fixation but skeletal relapse has been

reported to occur during the fixation period (Astrand and Ridell, 7973;

Rosenquist et al. 7982; Jonsson et al. 1983).

The aetiology of relapse is considered to be multifactorial since univariate

analysis of relapse by some authors produced insufficient results for predicting

relapse potential (Pepersack and Chausse, 1978; Kurihara, 7984; Kobayashi et al.

1986). Although the contribution of each individual factor causing relapse is

undetermined, certain factors are more reliable the others. Michiwaki et al.

(7990) reviewed the literature and suggested that aetiological factors in relapse

must include:

(i)

(ii )

(iii)

(iv)

condylar growth;

postoperative tension or pressure of the pterygomasseteric sling;

immaturity of bony union; and

tongue pressure after reduction of tongue space.

In order to understand relapse in its vector components, changes in the position

of the mandible after setback gives insight into what is expected. These changes

appear to be of two types and apparently have not always been separated in

previous investigations (Astrand et aL.1973). The two types of changes are:

(i) A rotation of the mandible with superior shift of the chin which occurs

mainly in the fixation period followed by

(ii) An anterior gliding of the entire mandible which occurs mainly between

the fixation period and the six month control period.

Page 62: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

62

Following these early positional changes, a generally accepted expectation is the

tendency to continue relapse for up to one and a half to two and a half years.

Hall et al. (7975) reiterated that, in general, there is an eventual one to two

millimetres forward movement and slight backward rotation of the mandible

from the immediate postoperative position following mandibular setback via

an intraoral vertical subsigmoid osteotomy.

4.2 ORTHODONTICS AND OCCLUSION

Among the factors mentioned affecting stability of orthognathic surgery,

presurgical orthodontics has been reported (Welch, 1989). Although there are

no control studies of skeletal stability after mandibular setback in samples with

and without orthodontics, presurgical alignment and decompensations have

been greatly emphasised as an adjunct in orthognathic surgery (Bell et al. 1980;

Henderson and Poswillo, 1985; Epker and Fish, 1985; Proffit et al. 1997). It has

also been shown that vertical and horizontal dimensions can be altered by the

mechanics of presurgical orthodontics resulting in varied intermediate

mandibular positions due to occlusal interferences (Vasir et al. 1,991.). Greater

stability of mandibular setback procedures is thought to be associated with a

better postoperative occlusion (Phillips et aL. '1,986; Wisth, 1981). Astrand and

Ridell (1973 ) found in their study that the entire dental arch was subjected to a

tooth regulating effect during rotation of the mandible with retroclination of the

incisors as a result, the reason being that cap splints were used for fixation. The

return of the incisors to their previous position at the six months control period

may therefore be interpreted as relapse. In a separate paper which analysed

relapse by studying the occlusion, Astrand and Ridell (7973) noted that occlusal

relapse was found to be '1,'l.,% of the surgical retroposition at 6 months,1.5Vo at 18

months and L9% at 30 months. They also stated that the degree of occlusal

relapse tended to be greater in cases with lack of intercuspation. Johanson et al.

Page 63: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

63

(1979) reported an average relapse in overbite of 1.5 mm over five years and

emphasised that the relapse occurred during the whole postoperative control

period with 0.2 mm relapse occurring between the two and a half year control

period and the five year control period. The importance of good intercuspation

to reduce the risk of relapse has been pointed out by Becker (7966). Bell and

Creekmore (7973) also state that although gross skeletal changes take place

postoperatively, the occlusion generally remained stable.

Extrusion of the lower incisors has been recorded during the period of fixation

after horizontal osteotomy of the ramus and this effect has also been shown in

vertical osteotomies of the ramus by Astrand and Ridell (1,973). Hovell (7964)

and Nordenham and Waller (1968) have confirmed such extrusion in

horizontal osteotomy and Ahlen and Rosenquist (1990) have supported this

finding in vertical osteotomies of the ramus of the mandible. Other research

has failed to find any correlation between fixation and extrusion in vertical

subsigmoid osteotomy of the ramus (Nordenham and Waller, 1,968).

It has been suggested that presurgical orthodontic treatment may actually

predispose to postoperative dental and skeletal alteration. Poulton, Taylor and

Ware (7963) found in a study of five cases of mandibular prognathism without

open bite that surgical treatment by vertical subsigmoid osteotomy without

presurgical orthodontics resulted in minimal relapse. Bell and Creekmore

(1973) also found less tendency for relapse with the same treatment methods.

With this in mind, these researchers advocate the use of orthodontics at the

completion of surgery when the mandible has stabilised They also support the

idea of overcorrection of the mandibular setback when orthodontics is used

adjunctively. Astrand and Ridell (1,973) detailed conflicting results and stated

that in their material the degree of relapse did not vary with preoperative

orthodontics. Johanson et al. (7979) confirmed this when they compared surgery

Page 64: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

64

with orthodontic (n=32) and without orthodontic treatment (n=55) and found

that the relapse tendenry were of the same magnitude in both samples. Isaacson

et al. (7978) remarked that the tendency for skeletal relapse of anterior open bite

due to condylar displacement during the fixation period is masked and

compensated by extrusion of the anterior dentition as much as 1-3 mm during

the six weeks of maxillomandibular fixation.

Kahnberg and Ridell (1988) found in a study, treating open bite and concomitant

prognathic deformities by oblique sliding osteotomies, that a compensatory

mechanism in incisor angulation occurs which maintains the occlusion even

though relapse occurs skeletally. The angulation between the upper incisors

and the nasal plane increases as does the lower incisor angulation to the

mandibular plane. They also found a decrease in the interincisal angle as a

result of dental compensation during skeletal relapse and also, probably, as a

result of continued tongue thrust habit. Willmot and Moss (1984) found similar

upper incisor angulation changes but noted lower incisor retroclination when

the mandible was setback horizontally only with no vertical changes involved.

Kahnberg and Ridell (1988) reasoned that a pure closure of an open bite by

vertical ramus operation only would certainly experience considerable relapse.

However, when the closure is combined with a backwards movement of the

mandible, the mechanics are altered such that they facilitate stretching of muscle

fibres both in the suprahyoid and in the masseter and pterygoid group of

muscles.

Moss (1984) found in his electromyographic investigations that the upper

incisors had proclined further in the postoperative period following mandibular

setback and related this to an increase in the activity of the anterior temporal

and posterior masseter muscles. This increased muscle activity was a consistent

Page 65: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

65

finding following setback procedures. Contrary to these findings, Ahlen and

Rosenquist (1990) found in their study, using anterior skeletal fixation, that the

changes in angulation of the incisors to their skeletal bases was minimal. They

reported that the maxillary incisors were essentially in the same position at 18

months as they were preoperatively and that the mandibular incisors

reÍoclined during the entire observation period. It was suggested that this effect

may be the result of relapse of an overcorrected lower incisor proclination

during the orthodontic phase of treatment. Simpson (7974) alluded to the role

of the tongue in occlusal stability and found that the maxillary incisors

remained stable following surgery whereas the lower incisors proclined. It was

postulated that this was due to the effect of tongue pressure. He also noted that

the intercanine and intermolar widths had increased and this supported his

notion that the tongue was active in the postoperative phase. The literature on

the stability of lower incisor proclination following presurgical orthodontics is

controversial and although some reports confirm that lower incisor

retroclination following surgery is inevitable (Artun et al. 7990; Mills, 'J,966),

other studies have shown that dental decompensations in Class III surgical

correction can be stable (Vasir et al. 1991).

4.2.1, Postoperative management

The role of postoperative management in contributing to or preventing relapse

has not been determined. It is possible that postoperative Class III elastics may

prevent anterior movement of the mandible and cause the muscles and their

attachments to better adapt to the new position. Hirose et al. (7976) trialed the

use of elastics as well as the wearing of a chin cap for as long as six months in an

attempt to avoid relapse and downward displacement that might occur as the

result of renewed mandibular function. They found that this adjunctive

treahnent aided stability of mandibular setback procedures.

Page 66: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

66

4.3 MAGNITUDE OF MANDIBULAR SETBACK

Franco et al. (7989), in a study of single jaw procedures, found that the only

influence resulting in relapse of the mandible was the magnitude of the setback.

The amount of correction at surgery has been cited by other investigators as one

of the possible causes of relapse (Abe et al. 1980; Reitzik, 1980; Astrand et al.

1,973). Kobayashi et al. (1986) stated that a significant relapsing potential may

exist when the amount of correction exceeded 10 mm. On the contrary,

Johanson et al. (7979) found no correlation between the degree of posterior

positioning or closure of open bite at the operation and relapse tendency in a

review of 772 patients treated by oblique sliding osteotomy. Pepersack and

Chausse (7978) and Sorokolit and Nanda (1,990) found no correlation between

amount of surgical setback and the amount of anterior relapse in a study of

mandibular setback procedures with rigid fixation. Astrand et al. (7973)

identified a positive correlation between the tendency to anterior open bite and

the degree of surgical retropositioning and likewise Reitzik (1980) observed

frequent postsurgical vertical relapse manifest as an open bite among 50 Class III

patients treated by a variety of techniques. Rosenquist et al. (1985), using a

stereomeÍic methodology to study relapse in three planes of space, reported that

there was no correlation between the amount of surgical setback and the

amount of displacement of the mandible during maxillomandibular fixation

and reasoned that suprahyoid muscle tension was reduced. They found weak

correlations between the amount of surgical setback and anterior relapse after

removal of maxillomandibular fixation. Moss (1990), in identifying the tongue

as a cause of relapse, reasoned that one would expect that the degree of relapse

would be related to the degree of mandibular setback.

Page 67: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

67

4.4 CONDYLAR POSITION

Emphasis has now been placed on mandibular condylar position in the pre-

treatment assessment of dentofacial deformities and during intraoperative

manipulation of the mandibular fragments since it has been shown that

distraction of the condyle occurred during surgery (Schendel and Epker, 1980).

This resulted in immediate relapse following release of maxillomandibular

fixation. Relapse of surgical and non surgical cases may be related to pre-existing

pathology in the joint (Doyle,7986), adaptive changes of the joint (Le Banc et al.

1.982; Doyle, 1986; Moore et al. 199'1.), condylar resorption after orthognathic

surgery (Merkx and Van Damme, 1994) or inadequate positioning of the condyle

in the fossa (Kohn, 7978; Lake et al. 1981). Fish and Epker (1986) hightighted the

possibility that orthognathic surgical procedures involving the mandible

especially may cause minor displacement of the mandibular condyle in relation

to the mandibular fossa. Attempts have been made to control this with a

variety of devices (Leonard, 7976; Leonard, 1985) and techniques (Hall et al. 7975;

Hall and McKenna, 7987; Ware and Taylor, 7968). Rotskoff et al. (7991) have

even trialed the use of a geometric splint during the healing phase to

compensate for the magnitude of condylar displacement. This splint replaces

the original splint during the healing phase and holds the distal segment in an

overcorrected position to prevent anterior open bites when the condyle re-

establishes its preoperative position. Some surgeons believe that the proximal

segment should be surgically repositioned before bony union occurs to

minimise post fixation occlusal and osseous changes (Hall et al. 7975; Bell,

Proffit and White, 1980). Kundert and Hadjiangelou (1980) hightighted the fact

that condylar displacement occurs in three dimensions with rotation and tilting

of the condylar head following surgery. The final position is dictated by the

position of the tooth bearing fragments and occlusion, by the mutual

relationship and adaptation of the fragments, fixed either by wires, screws or left

Page 68: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

68

unsecured and finally by the musculature. Aberrant condylar position (also

known as condylar sag) is considered by many to be a major factor in relapse

with all types of mandibular surgery whether advancement or setback (Edlund

et al. 1979; Flase, 7988; Hollender and Ridell,7974; Rosenquist, 7988; Sund et al.

7983; Will et aL.1984; Wisth and Tornes,1975). Tendencies to relapse after ramal

surgical procedures have commonly involved clockwise rotation of distal

segments that had been surgically rotated counterclockwise i.e. relapse of

surgically corrected anterior open bites. For an anterior open bite to relapse, the

healed segments would have to rotate as a single unit in a clockwise direction.

For this to occur without a change in mandibular morpholoçy, the condyle

would have to move superiorly in the fossa as the anterior open bite relapsed

around a fulcrum of molars in contact. With the use of the vertical subsigmoid

osteotomy technique, the condylar fragment is separated from the distal

segment and its position is dependent on muscle pull during the period of

maxillomandibular fixation. Condylar sag typically occurred when the masseter

and medial pterygoid attachments to the proximal segment were removed.

With modification of surgical technique, which maintained adequate medial

pterygoid muscle attachment to the proximal segment, condylar sag was avoided

(Hall and McKenna, 1,987). Displacement of the proximal segment during

surgery has been reported with displacement occurring in an anteroposterior

direction usually (Astrand and Ericson,1.974; Isaacson et al. 7978). The degree of

condylar displacement following mandibular surgery varies between different

surgical techniques and imaging techniques, tomographic methods being far

superior to plain radiographic techniques (Eckerdal et al. 1986). Sund et al. (1983)

reported an average horizontal condylar displacement of 3.2 mm following

oblique sliding osteotomy and Wisth and Tornes (1975) reported a significant

downward and forward displacement of about 1 mm whereas an average

postoperative condylar displacement of less than L mm was found after sagittal

splitting of the mandibular rami (Edlund et al. 7979; Will et al. 1984). Rotskoff

Page 69: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

69

et al. (7991) believed that the cause of condylar sag was a result of the pull of the

lateral pterygoid muscle.

If the segments of the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy did heal with the condyles

in a displaced position, an immediate posterior translational relapse of the

mandible would be expected to occur at the time of release of the

maxillomandibular fixation as the proximal segments would return to the

fossae in a posterosuperior direction. Isaacson et al. (1978) stated that this does

not occur as the proximal segments return to its original position during the

period of maxillomandibular fixation if the segments are not secured together by

osteosutures. The study by Rosenquist et al. (1986) confirms that this is the case.

Petersson and Willmar-Hogeman (1989) also found no correlation between

mandibular relapse and the degree of immediate postoperative condylar

displacement.

The variability of skeletal remodelling has been reported as between 7-80%

following oblique sliding osteotomy of the mandible (Wisth and Tornes, 7975;

Eckerdal et al. 1986). Remodelling of the condyle by bony apposition may be an

attempt at normalisation of the loading of the joint altered by surgery. Previous

studies corroborate the finding that a morphological adaptation of the condyle

occurs after altered position of the mandible but it is important to note that

these changes were primarily occurring in young experimental animals who

were able to adapt and compensate for these new positions (Boyne, 1,966;

McNamara and Carlson, 7979; McNamara et al. 'I.,982; McNamara, 7980;

Schneiderman and Carlson, 1985). Ware and Taylor (1968) concluded that

distraction of the condyle within the fossa may serve as a stimulus to

compensatory condylar growth and could be the cause of the double contour

formation seen on radiographs. Hansson (7977) concluded that an increase in

biomechanical loading of the temporomandibular joint was the reason for

Page 70: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

70

stimulating the undifferentiated mesenchymal cells to proliferate with

subsequent cartilage formation and possibly this was followed by endochondral

ossification. Further skeletal remodelling also occurs in the roof of the fossa in

the posterior surface of the fossa, a functional adaptation to condylar

displacement. Eckerdal et al. (1986) confirmed this finding in the temporal part

of the joint and the corresponding value was a mean bony apposition of 0.9

mm. Hall and McKenna (1987) have advanced a method for rectification of

condylar sag whereby the medial pterygoid muscle attachment is retained

allowing this muscle tone to position the condyle.

Most surgical methods of the mandible involve the risk of changing the relation

between the condyle and mandibular fossa. Such a change after horizontal

osteotomy is due to anterior rotation of the upper fragment. Lundberg (1972)

found that this change did not produce any subjective symptoms of the

temporomandibular joint. Fromm et al. (1962) agreed with this even though 14

cases (327o) had clinically demonstrable temporomandibular joint signs.

Hogeman (1951) reported temporomandibular joint symptoms ín 27.2% of the

patients who had been followed up for a long time. It would be presumed that

temporomandibular joint symptoms would occur with greater frequency

following vertical subsigmoid osteotomy for a number of reasons. Firstly,

lateral angulation of the proximal fragment relative to the distal fragment

results in a change of the condylar head position in the glenoid fossa. Secondly,

presumed stretching of the lateral pterygoid muscle associated with the lateral

rotation of the proximal fragment may further increase myofascial symptoms

but remodelling of the condylar head is known to occur and this possibly

accounts for the lack of symptoms.

Plain radiographic examination of the segments following vertical subsigmoid

osteotomies have a number of disadvantages in that it is usually difficult to

Page 71: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

77

identify defined points in the joint at consecutive examinations as the condyle

may rotate about its sagittal and vertical axes. Remodelling of the joint may also

make identification of defined points difficult. In an attempt to resolve this

dilemma, Astrand and Ericson (7974) used frontal radiographs to study the

lateral angulation of the condylar segments while Sund et al. (1983) used lateral

tomography as well as frontal and axial radiographs to obtain three dimensional

configurations of the joint. Even then it was difficult to determine the accuracy

of their results although the results did yield changes in the condyle to fossa

relationship. The x-ray stereometric method devised by Selvik (7974) improved

the scientific examination of mandibular segment movements. Rosenquist

(1988) used this methodology and was able to report with more accuracy that the

condylar head displaced in a medial/superior direction with a weaker tendency

to displace posteriorly during the period of maxillomandibular fixation. He

reasoned that the inferior part of the condylar segment becomes displaced

laterally by the postoperative oedema resulting in a medial translation of the

condylar head. He also explained that the superior and posterior movement of

the condylar head lies in the assumption that "there was decreased tension in

the muscles that displace the condyle anteroinferiorly as the muscular

equilibrium was disturbed during surgery". After release of fixation, condylar

displacement tended towards a lateral translation as well as an inferior and

anterior direction as most other studies have shown as noted above.

4.5 PRO)OMAL AND DISTAL SEGMENT POSITIONING

Interfragmentary movement occurs between the proximal and distal segments

following surgery of the ramus of the mandible. These rotational movements

have been thought to be unfavourable and consequently have been implicated

as one of the many factors involved in surgical relapse following mandibular

surgery (Isaccson, et aI.7978).

Page 72: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

72

4.5.1. Rotational effects between fragments

Positional changes of the proximal and distal segments after surgical correction

of mandibular deformities have been reported. Clinical observations and

several reports have remarked that the proximal segment does not always

remain in an unchanged position following surgery whether the segments are

left free or are intraosseously fixed (Hall et al. 7975; McNeill et al. 7973; Ware and

Taylor, 7968). One cause of these positional changes is the presence of only

small contact areas between the fragments. When the contact areas are small it

may take much longer for the fragments to stabilise and during this period the

position of the mandible may be altered by muscular forces. Caldwell and

Letterman (7954) stressed that the osteotomy should end anterior to the

mandibular angle. The rationale for this anterior extension of the osteotomy

cut was to provide a better bony contact between the fragments. Tornes (1989)

however, showed that no significant correlations could be demonstrated

between postoperative stability and osteotomy length or overlapping bony area

and concluded that the osteotomy length appears to be a factor of minor

importance for postoperative stability.

Franco et al. (1989) identified in his study of rigidly fixed mandibular setbacks

that muscular interactions played a definite role in relapse. He reasoned that

there is a tendency for the proximal segment to rotate clockwise with

mandibular setbacks. Unless the attachments on the medial aspect of the

proximal segment are detached and measures taken to prevent rotation, then

the further the distal segment is setback, the greater the tendency for the

proximal segment to rotate. When the distal segment is positioned posteriorly

without detachment of muscles in the proximal segment, the medial

attachments are placed under tension. Consequently, clockwise rotation of the

proximal segment elongates and stretches the lateral attachments. Both these

Page 73: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

73

effects will result in a tendency for the mandible to relapse back towards its

original position. Komori et al. (1989) supports this contention and confirmed

in a study of mandibular sagittal split osteotomy setbacks with

maxillomandibular fixation and skeletal fixation, that the degree of inadvertent

anteroposterior rotation of the proximal segment at the time of surgery, rather

than extent and pattern of surgical repositioning of the distal segment, was

significantly correlated with the degree of shift. The finding in this study

confirmed the importance of preserving the proximal segment in its exact

presurgical anatomic position without rotating the segment either backward or

forward.

Astrand and Ericson (1974) reported that the morphologic changes between the

proximal and distal fragments varied with the immediate postoperative relation

between the fragments. In cases with a good adaptation of the fragments only,

small remodelling changes occurred whereas in cases with greater lateral

angulation of the profmal fragment, extensive remodelling occurred.

4.5.2 Medial displacement of proximal segment

The technique of vertical subsigmoid osteotomy requires that the proximal

segment be positioned lateral to the distal segment. In the extraoral approach to

the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy the proximal segment is easily maintained in

the lateral position, however, with the intraoral vertical subsigmoid osteotomy,

medial displacement of the segment has been reported to occur in about 3% to

8To of cases (Tuinzing et al. 1983; Tuinzing and Greebe, 1.985; Rosenquist, 1990).

Rosenquist (1990) further brought attention to the implications of medial

displacement of the proximal segment. Medial displacement can occur during

surgery but in most instances the displacement occurs postoperatively.

Calderon et al. (7992) described a number of methods to retrieve the medially

Page 74: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

74

displaced proximal fragment so that it can be repositioned laterally and uses

manipulative, as well as dedicated instrumentation, to achieve this. Burk (1968)

published a variation of the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy whereby the

proximal segment was placed medially to the distal segment out of mechanical

necessity. Substantial postoperative displacement of the proximal segment has

been reported (Hollender and Ridell, 7974; Rosenquist, 1988; Wisth and Tornes,

7975). Rosenquist (1990) elaborated on this problem by suggesting that medial

displacement of the proximal segment had no influence on relapse and even

suggested that, in fact, it could lead to increased stability of the osteotomy as less

angulation of the proximal segment increased its contact area with the distal

segment. Contrary to this suggestion, Poulton et al. (1963) in a much earlier

statement remarked that if the proximal segment is not placed lateral to the

distal fragment of the mandible a non union may result and relapse would be

inevitable.

4.5.3 Wire osteosynthesis between the proximal and distal segments

Osteotomies of the mandible may be performed through an intraoral or through

an extraoral approach. Only through an extraoral approach is it possible to apply

wire osteosynthesis to approximate the proximal and distal fragments. Wiring

of the proximal segment to the distal segment was thought to cause more drastic

changes and relapse potential following mandibular setback. The fact that the

proximal fragment is placed lateral to the distal part of the ramus will make it

impossible to reposition the condylar head in its natural presurgical position

and a tight osteowire may even further distort the position of the condylar head.

Ritzau et al. (1939) compared changes in condylar position after bilateral vertical

subsigmoid osteotomies with and without osteosynthesis and found no

correlation between postoperative condylar position whether or not

osteosynthesis had been used. He noted that the postoperative condylar

Page 75: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

75

position was, however, significantly different when related to its original

position. Athanasiou et al. (7991,) reported that the placement of wire

osteosynthesis between the mandibular bony segments had no significant effect

on the postoperative stability in their study of 52 patients. Nordin et al. (1986)

compared the skeletal and dental relapse rates as well as mandibular function

between extraoral and intraoral approaches and concluded that there were no

significant differences between the two surgical techniques. On the contrary,

Isaacson et al. ('1,978), in a dedicated study, examined the movement of the

segments following surgery and generally found that there were examples of

condyles being displaced inferiorly and anteriorly in their fossa. They also noted

that if, the proximal segments were not tied in their displaced position by

intraosseous fixation, then they frequently returned to a stable position and no

postsurgical occlusal relapse occurred. Flowever, relapse of dental open bite was

evident in the first few days after release of maxillomandibular fixation if the

proximal segments were fixed securely. When Paulus and Steinhauser (7982)

compared patients having wire osteosynthesis to those treated with screw

fixation for vertical subsigmoid osteotomies to treat mandibular prognathism

there appeared to be less difference in stability between the groups. Sund et al.

(1983) have shown specificallf , in a study of temporomandibular joint changes,

that there were also no unfavourable effects on the joint with the use of

osteosynthesis wiring between the fragments.

Page 76: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

76

4.6 MAXILLOMANDIBULAR FIXATION

4.6|1. Period of maxillomandibular fixation

It has been suggested that the period of maxillomandibular fixation is an

important factor in relapse of the mandible. Most authors recommend a

fixation period of six to seven weeks (Hinds, 1957; Bell and Creekmore 7973;

Hirose et al. 1,976; Werndah and Blomquist, 1981 cited in Rosenquist et at. 1986).

Other researchers recommend variable time periods of maxillomandibular

fixation. Alling (1967) initially suggested five to six weeks but in a later review,

a shorter period of fixation of two weeks was used (Alling, 1965). Astrand and

Ridell (1,973) recommended a longer period of seven to eight weeks and

Hogeman (1967) proposed an even longer period of ten weeks. These results are

summarised in Table 4.1.

Table 4.1 Period of maxillomandibular fixation

3-5

6

7

5-7

8

6

5-6

10

6

8-9

1954

1958

1958

7967

1961,

7967

1965

1967

1968

7991

Caldwell & Letterman

Hinds

Robinson

Shira

Thoma

Georgiade & Quirur

Alling

Hogeman

Nordenham & Waller

Hogevold

WEEKS OF FIXATIONYEARAUTHOR

A pre-requisite for displacement of the mandibular body without displacement

of the condyles (ie. relapse) is non union or a plasticity of the osteotomy site.

Page 77: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

77

Early reports believed that excellent bone healing had occurred at the time of

removal of maxillomandibular fixation (Caldwell and Letterman, 7954; Hinds,

7957; Alling, 7967; Shira, 1961.; Proffit and White, 7970; Reitzik, '1.983; Rosenquist

et al. 7987). However, Ware and Taylor (7968), Astrand and Ridell (1973) and

Reitzik (1980) all became aware of the possibility that the bone scar at the time of

removal of maxillomandibular fixation may be unable to resist the muscle

forces when function was regained. It was not until this possibility was raised

that experimental work on monkeys was undertaken to determine the time

period at which full strength of osteotomy sites was re-established. It was found

that a minimum time periodof 20 weeks was necessary for remodelling to occur

in monkeys and a further 4-6 weeks was necessary for remodelling to occur in

humans. Hence 26 weeks is the minimum period required to minimise plastic

deformation of the mandible although clinically this time period is impractical.

Management problems may be encountered with the use of maxillomandibular

fixation. These can range from loss of weight to respiratory problems.

Maxillomandibular fixation causes partial obstruction of the oral airway and

possibly oxygen saturation levels may be affected (Barton and Harris,7970). Loss

of weight during fixation may occur unless careful consideration is given to diet.

Ritzau (1,973) highlighted this problem in patients placed into

maxillomandibular fixation as a method to treat mandibular fractures.

4.6.2 Maturitv of bone union

A pre-requisite for displacement of the mandibular body without displacement

of the condyles is non union or plasticity of the osteotomy site. Immaturity of

the bony callus at the osteotomy site has been implicated as a cause of relapse

(Martis, 1,984; Reitzik, 1980). Worms et al. (1980) stated that the union at the

osteotomy site may actually be fibrous rather than bony. Reitzik (1982) has

Page 78: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

78

shown that, even under the most ideal conditions, it takes 20 weeks for full

strength to return to an osteotomy site in the monkey and the equivalent time

period when extrapolated to man is about 26 weeks. Johanson et al. (7979) in a

study reviewing 112 patients found bone healing to be uncomplicated in every

case and radiographic examination showed that the healing process was

complete within one and a half years. However, Rosenquist et al. (7987)

recorded, by means of X-ray stereometry, mobility between the proximal and

distal segments two years after surgery and stated that relapse after oblique

sliding osteotomy continues as long as the functional matrix can influence an

unstable osteotomy site.

Other issues raised in relation to bone repair include the effect of cortex to cortex

contact and its subsequent healing and the effect of interfragmentary mobility

during the fixation period as physiology principles dictate that mobility has a

detrimental effect on bone repair. Osteoprogenitor cells, required for bone

healing originate from the cambium layer of the periosteum and endosteum

(Hempenstall, 1980). Theoretically, íf cortex to cortex healing is attempted

following osteotomy without decortication, both the cells and the blood supply

necessary for healing may be reduced at the site and consequently the relapse

potential may be greater. Reitzik (1983) studied this issue and established that

firm bony union occurred at seven weeks, only where cortical surfaces were in

intimate contact and rigidly fixed. He also showed that external callus filled the

gaps between the cortical surfaces only if the gaps were less than 0.8 mm wide

whereas fibrous union occurred if the gaps were greater than 0.8 mm.

Page 79: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

79

4.6.3 Wires

Ductility of wires, ie. stretching of wires between visits, affects osteotomy site

healing. It has been noticed that, during the period of maxillomandibular

fixation, loosening of the maxillomandibular wires occurs, to some extent,

allowing freedom of movement of the mandible. Although, in most cases,

minor movement is possible, relapse associated with this entity has never been

addressed. It is known that wires have plasticity and ductility to the point of

stretching under force. It is also known that immobilisation has a major

influence in bone repair. Hence wire distortion must account for some

component of relapse during maxillomandibular fixation.

4.6.4 Skeletal fixation

In '1.947, Goldstein alluded to the possibility of extrusion of teeth during the

period of fixation stating that "the load should be as well distributed over all the

teeth as possible to avoid any extrusion". Many authors advocated the use of

skeletal fixation in addition to maxillomandibular fixation to minimise skeletal

relapse as displacement of the mandible occurs during the fixation period and

also to avoid incisor extrusion (Astrand and Ridell, 1973; Rosenquist et al. 1982;

Jonsson et al. 1,983; Rosenquist, 1.985; Stella, 1.986; Epker and Wessberg, 1,982;

Nystrom et al. 7984). Komori et al. (1989) compared mandibular setbacks via

sagittal split osteotomies with and without skeletal fixation and found

statistically significant similar results with good control of the corrected chin

position and incisor extrusion. Further, Hall et aL. (7975) reassured that the

absence of intraosseous wiring of the fragments permitted the condyle to move

out of its fossa which in turn led to occlusal relapse. However, Isaccson et al.

(7978) and Astrand et al. (7973) found no evidence for greater stability with the

use of intraosseous wiring. Tornes and Wisth (1988) indicated that skeletal

Page 80: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

80

fixation in combination with maxillomandibular fixation reduces the extrusion

of incisors but, except for a more stable anterior facial height, the influence on

skeletal changes is limited. This was further confirmed by Ahlen and

Rosenquist (1990) who concluded that the anterior skeletal fixation seemed to

prevent the previously observed increase in anterior facial height and a decrease

in the posterior shortening of the mandible but this effect was marginal.

Baumrind et al. (7974) noted in their study that the mandibular plane angle was

found to have increased between the presurgical and postsurgical films. It was

suggested that there was a tendency for the upper and lower incisors to extrude

slightly from the investing bone coupled with the findings that the point

gonion tended to move superiorly more than the inferior movement of

menton and this accounted for the increased mandibular plane angle.

4.6.5 Nutritional aspects of healing

The patient undergoing maxillofacial surgery presents unique nutritional

problems especially when the jaws are fixated for a period of time. Since the

oral cavity is the natural entry into the alimentary tract, surgery or trauma to

this area can easily lead to difficulties in alimentation. The major cause of

nutritional problems is the inability to ingest adequate amounts of nutrients

orally. This can be due to a mechanical problem of not being able to get food

into the mouth as well as the inability to meet the increased metabolic demands

(Buchanon and Levine, 1983). Maxillomandibular fixation is known to

compromise nutritional status which consequently leads to weight loss

(Worrall, 7994).

Basic wound healing dictates that an adequate source of vitamin C, calcium,

protein and minerals are required for an acceptable maturation of the surgical

wound. In addition, it is known that a negative nitrogen balance will occur in

Page 81: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

81

these patients postoperatively resulting from both a decreased protein synthesis

and accelerated catabolism of muscle protein (Fallender et al. 7987). The

importance of proteins in healing is demonstrated in a number of areas; they

provide a source of heat and energy, and they provide amino acids for the

formation of antigens, hormones, antibodies and enzymes. Proteins are

necessary for the transport of lipids in the body and for maintenance of normal

blood volume, serum protein levels and total circulating blood cell mass.

Proteins are important regulators of osmotic pressures between various body

fluids. Proteins are also the substrates for the repair and replacement of injured

and destroyed tissue. Consequently, proteins play an important role in bone

healing. Adequate dietary proteins favour deposition of calcium in the bone

and the subsequent formation of callus following fractures. Research has shown

that little callus formation occurs in the hypoproteinemic animal following

fracture whereas good callus formation occurs in animals receiving protein

intake (Rhoads and Kasinskas, 1,942).

When the dietary intake in a healthy patient is reduced for as little as 10 - 12

days, vitamin and protein deficiencies may occur which consequently affects

physical fitness, lowers resistance to disease and interferes with healing (Zintet,

7964). Rodgers et al. 09n) found that a jaw wired for obese patients on an 800

cal/day diet had no biochemical evidence of protein catabolism. Goss (personal

communication, 1994) performed a sagittal split osteotomy on a morbidly obese

patient with prognathism. This patient required jaw wiring for obesity and

orthognathic surgery to correct her prognathic mandible. Satisfactory union

occurred despite being on a very low caloric fluid diet. At five years, however,

both the mandibular setback and obesity had significantly relapsed.

Page 82: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

82

Therefore, by providing a nutritionally adequate diet in the preoperative and

postoperative periods and during convalescence, the duration of disability after

surgery can be significantly shortened, complications reduced and wound

healing improved (Jones, 7970).

The literature presents varying figures as to the appropriate requirements

necessary for healing to occur and has recommended that non protein calories

be provided in the diet so that proteins are used for repair and not as energy.

The recommendations have ranged from a non protein source of 2,800

calories/day (Calloway and Spector, 7954) to an increase in protein from 30Vo to

700Vo in order to fulfil the demands of these functions (Hayes, 7959). In

conclusion, protein, calories and all nutrients need to be supplied in liberal

amounts. As a guide, it is necessary to provide 150 grams of protein and 3,000

non protein calories daily for the patient in convalescence (Jones, 7970).

4.7 MUSCULAR INTERACTIONS

4.7.7 Tongue pressure after reduction of tongue space

Surgical procedures designed to correct dentoskeletal deformities inevitably

affect the size and position of the surrounding soft tissues by altering the pre-

existing soft tissue - hard tissue relationship. This alteration is well documented

with established ratios for soft and hard tissue changes for chin and lips (Lew,

1,990; Mommaerts and Marxer, 1,987; Dewan and Marjadi,7983; Obwegeser and

Marentette,'l.,986). Flowever, the effects on pharlmgeal tissues has not been

studied as extensively. Bear and Priest (1980) and Kuo (7979) noted that

mandibular advancement improved sleep apnoea and early investigations

showed that the tongue adapted to its new environment following mandibular

setback procedures (Wickwire et al. 1972; Proffit and White,7970). However, it is

Page 83: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

83

possible that in the early postoperative period, the tongue may have an adverse

effect on the postsurgical position of the mandible. The changes in the position

of the tongue have been implicated in relapse by Hovell (7964). There is the

philosophy that eliminating the area of the floor of the mouth by mandibular

setback procedures will not allow the tongue to accommodate. This factor could

result in a forward movement of the mandible as labial pressure decreases and

lingual pressure increases correspondingly after the operation. It may also cause

some difficulties in speech, mastication, and swallowing (Malakouti,7970).

Contrary to these proposals, Greco et al. (1990) found that mandibular setback

procedures created a relative narrowing of the hypopharyngeal airway space due

to tongue positioning as seen on lateral head cephalograms. Hence the tongue

must either re-adapt in this new position by changing its size, shape or position

or try to enforce its preoperative position with subsequent relapse of the

mandible. The tongue is believed to play an important role in the pathogenesis,

continuation and relapse of dysgnathic disorders and reduction of the tongue

has been indicated for a number of reasons. Moss (1990) studied the position of

the tongue following surgery and reported that in stable mandibular setbacks,

the tongue position shifted upwards and backwards whereas in those that

relapsed, the tongue position shifted upwards only. This implied that the

anterior tongue forces remained constant in relapse cases. The premise for

reduction of tongue volume is that muscular pressure exerted on adjacent

structures following tongue reduction would reduce and this would decrease

relapse of mandibular setback procedures.

Page 84: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

u

1

Tongue reduction has been suggested in the following situations:

To support orthodontic treatment of abnormalities in which the tongue

possibly plays a role in the pathogenesis (Becker, 1,966; Egyedi, 1964;

Rheinwald, 1,960).

2. Partial glossectomy has also been suggested preparatory to surgical

treatment of dysgnathic disorders especially mandibular prognathism,

open bite and bimaxillary protrusion (Becker,7966; Kole, 7963; Onland,

7972; Rheinwal d, 7960).

3. Reduction of tongue volume is also indicated in cases of macroglossia

due to a tumour of the tongue (Becker, 1,966; Rheinwald,7960).

Much of the controversy about tongue reduction exists because it is difficult to

establish objectively to what extent tongue volume, function and position are

important in the pathogenesis of dysgnathic disorders. Some authors support

the idea that the tongue plays a role almost exclusively in causing relapse of

mandibular setback procedures (Egyedi and Obwegeser, 7964; Reichenbach, 1955;

Korkhaus,1958; Hinds and Kent, 1969). On the contrary, Proffit (7970) postulated

that the tongue pressure does not seem to cause relapse following surgery and

explained that the period of maxillomandibular fixation retrains the function of

the tongue. Rosenquist et al. (1985) reported in a study using a stereometric

methodology that there was no correlation between the amount of surgical

setback and the amount of relapse along the sagittal plane. They reasoned that

the length of the suprahyoid muscles was reduced, hence the tension of these

muscles did not contribute to relapse. Two other findings were evident in this

research. Firstly, an almost significant correlation was found between anterior

rotation of the mandible and posterior relapse. Assumedly, the suprahyoid

Page 85: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

85

muscles were stretched during this anterior rotation. Secondly, the relapse was

in the form of posterior translation rather than posterior rotation.

Smeets (7969), on the other hand, studied the position of the tongue before and

after correction of mandibular prognathism and concluded that the tongue

could not be held responsible for mandibular relapse. Studies by several

researchers have supported this concept and have stated that tongue pressure

against lower incisors following mandibular setback surgery did not change, nor

did flaring of incisor teeth or skeletal relapse occur which otherwise would

indicate increased tongue function (Joffe,1,964; Walker, 1,977).

A retrospective study by Onland (7972) concluded that the tongue plays a role in

relapse of mandibular setback procedures only when the dentoalveolar portion

is moved posteriorly, as in a Kole procedure, whereas no relapse occurs if a

stepped ostectomy is performed. On this basis, any surgery performed in the

ascending ramus simulates a stepped ostectomy and hence no relapse is

expected. He further explained that the tongue space is less reduced when the

whole anterior portion of the mandible is setback thereby reducing the space for

the floor of mouth musculature as well as the tongue. In contrast,

dentoalveolar setback impinges on tongue space because the musculature of the

floor of the mouth remains largely in the same position as does the tongue but

it occupies considerably less space after the Kole procedure. Significant changes

in tongue position can be assessed by analysing changes of hyoid position

(Athanasiou et al. 1991). Hyoid position and its orientation has been studied in

Class I and Class III malocclusions by Adamidis and Spyropolous (1992). The

conclusions showed that there were statistically significant differences in

position and inclination of the hyoid bone in the two groups. Class III patients

exhibited a more anterior position of the hyoid bone and also a reverse

inclination of the long axis of the hyoid bone to the mandibular plane.

Page 86: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

86

Wickwire et al. (7972) elaborated on the effect of mandibular osteotomy on

tongue position and concluded that the tongue position changed after surgery,

which was indicated by the hyoid position. After this initial adjustment there

was a tendency for the hyoid bone to return to its original position and hence

the stability of the surgical result would hinge on the stability of the hyoid

position. The hyoid bone is suspended between the conjoint actions of the

supra and infra hyoid muscles, consequently it is influenced by a number of

variables which include head posture and respiratory function. Also noting that

linear measurements of hyoid position on cephalometric recordings (Stepovich,

1965) of less than 2.0 mm are considered to be within physiological variation.

Solow and Kreiborg (7977) developed a model and suggested that changes in

craniofacial morphology will lead to changes in head posture through changes

in respiratory resistance. Two cephalometric studies have investigated the

airway after surgical correction of mandibular prognathism (Wenzel et al. 7989a;

Wenzel et al. 1989b). It was found that there was a reduction of the

anteroposterior dimension of the nasopharynx. Consequently, two

compensatory effects may be seen. Firstly, a cervical hyperflexion occurs and

secondly, tongue posture may re-adapt with forward repositioning of the

tongue. In each of these compensatory mechanisms, the hyoid bone is

repositioned to maintain the airway dimensions. Athanasiou et al. (7991)

showed that there were no significant changes in the anteroposterior position of

the hyoid bone in relation to the anterior pharyngeal wall because the hyoid

bone was directed downward and not backward following mandibular setback.

Wenzel et al. (1989a) remarked that cervical hyperflexion may be influenced by a

patient's increase in self esteem which stimulates the patient to lift their head

rather than an alteration of airway function. Phitlips et al. (1991) has shown in a

study of orthognathic surgery on head posture that, following maxillary

intrusion and mandibular setback, there was a trend toward persistent head

flexion. Valk et al. (7992) showed that anterior repositioning of the head is a

Page 87: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

87

natural reflex following any type of mandibular surgery, whether advancement

or setback.

4.7.2 Bite force and its vector components

Animal experiments by Picton and Moss (1978) have shown that the presence of

cusps retard tooth migration and that cuspal inclines either aid or hinder tooth

movement depending on the direction of the slope and the occlusal force

(Picton and Moss, 1980). Presumably, following surgery, poor interdigitation

would allow tooth migration and whether this is solely dental or in conjunction

with skeletal relapse is not known. Alternatively, good interdigitation of the

teeth would minimise relapse as the occlusal forces would oppose muscular

forces.

4.7.3 Masticatorymuscles

Electromyographic studies by Moss (7973) identified different patterns of muscle

activity in various types of malocclusion. Patients with Class III malocclusions

have a distinctive pattern of activity (Moss and Chalmers, 1,974). It has been

thought that, following surgical treatment of mandibular prognathism, this

muscle pattern would not have changed but evidence supports the idea that

there is altered activity. Therefore failure of the masticatory muscles to re-adapt

to the repositioned segments has been thought to contribute to relapse

(Pepersack and Chausse, 7978; Moss, 7984; Yellich, 1981). Moss (7984) suggested

that patients who do not show an increased activity in the anterior temporal

and posterior masseter muscles at the end of the retention period would tend to

relapse. A correlation was shown between increased muscle activity and

muscles which were less active in the untreated prognathic mandible and

therefore, if remained inactive, would tend to revert to their original position.

Page 88: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

88

Operative rotation of the proximal segment in any type of mandibular setback

procedure puts the pterygomasseteric sling under tension only if the muscle

sling is iatrogenically or physiologically shortened, which then continues until

biological equilibrium is achieved (Reitzik, 1980). Additionally, susceptibility to

relapse after release of maxillomandibular fixation supports the idea that

mandibular excursion may contribute to relapse. Functional movement of the

mandible activates the musculature to relieve the tension caused by operative

repositioning of the proximal segment. Consequently, the forces due to the

sling cause anti clockwise rotation of the proximal segment (now healed with

the distal segment) thereby causing relapse (Michiwaki et al. 1,990).

Hirose et al. (1976) described a new technique of a curved oblique osteotomy for

mandibular setback in which the ascending ramus was cut obliquely on a curved

line from the anterior border of the ramus to the mandibular angle by the

submandibular approach. In this procedure, the masseter and medial pterygoid

muscles were detached from the bone but were repositioned to their original

sites with no change in the direction and position in relation to the condyle and

to each other. This was thought to minimise relapse as the muscle forces are

involved in relapse. Although no conclusive evidence was available in this

study to support this conjecture, Reitzik (1988) also reported that reducing

changes to the muscle length and direction also reduced relapse following

surgery.

Page 89: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

89

4.8 VASCULAR CONSIDERATIONS OF OSSEOUS SEGMENTS

4.8.1 Healing of osseous segments

The vertical subsigmoid osteotomy is designed for comparatively large

retropositioning of the distal segment during surgery. Only then is the

adaptation of the segments optimal for healing. Small degrees of mandibular

setback lead to minor overlapping and poor adaptation of the segments. The

proximal segment would be angulated laterally and the contact with the distal

segment would be a line rather than an area. This inevitably does not lead to

optimal healing of the osteotomy sites and consequently relapse is further

enhanced (Astrand and Ericson, 1,974). It has also been suggested that medial

displacement of the proximal segment adversely affects healing in that firstly, a

haematoma develops in the space created as a result of medial displacement of

the proximal segment and secondly, the masseter muscle is not able to reattach

to the medially displaced proximal segment hindering the revascularization

Process.

Many advantages are achieved when the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy

technique is employed however there is considerable disagreement as to the

histopathologic and the chronological nature of the osseous healing in the

region of the bone section. The necessity of decortication of the distal segment

prior to mandibular setback has been emphasised to effect bony union (Caldwell

and Letterman, "1,954; Shira, 7967). Boyne (7966) reported that in monkey

experiments, the principle of decortication of the segments as a prerequisite to

effecting adequate osseous healing is in conflict with other widely held views.

He also found at autopsy of the monkeys that no mobility of the osteotomy sites

was discernible at 25 and 30 days.

Page 90: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

90

4.8.2 Viabilitv of osseous sesments

For any tissue to heal, an essential requirement is the maintenance of the

vascular supply to that tissue. Bell (1973) pioneered the studies of vascular

supply for the Le Fort I maxillary osteotomy. He has determined the vascular

supply for the oblique osteotomy of the mandible and using rhesus monkeys

(Bell et al. 7974), determined that when the segments are pedicled, the

intraosseous circulation was maintained. When the muscle and capsular

ligaments were detached from the proximal segment a free osseous segment

resulted and ischaemia, avascular necrosis and delayed healing occurred.

Westesson et al. (7991,) investigated the osseous and muscular changes after

vertical subsigmoid osteotomies with the use of magnetic resonance imaging

and found no evidence of avascular necrosis but did report atrophic changes in

muscle tissue with decreased volume and fatty changes.

4.9 GROWTH

4.9J1, Normal growth

The timing of skeletal ossification has a significant influence on diagnosis and

treatment planning. The assessment of skeletal maturity influences clinical

decisions related to the commencement of orthopaedic forces, functional

appliances and orthognathic surgery. Considerable disagreement is found in the

literature on the timing of surgical procedures for correction of dentofacial

anomalies. Some authors contend that surgical correction of mandibular

prognathism can be carried out at a very early age (Biederman, 7967; Ware and

Taylor, 7968; Isaccson et al. 1978; Macintosh , 1981,; Lehman, 1981). Other authors

caution against such corrections prior to growth maturity since individuals with

Class III malocclusions tend to have a prolonged period of mandibular growth

Page 91: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

97

(Goldstein, 7947; Proffit and White, '1,970; Hinds and Kent, 7972). In a study by

Bell and Creekmore (1973), four patients had postoperative relapse and this was

attributed to excessive mandibular growth associated with their young age at the

time of operation. Efforts have been made to establish ways to treat Class III

malocclusions surgically during the growth period but these efforts seem to

meet with a high degree of relapse. In these circumstances, having orthodontic

appliances on the teeth after surgery has offered some, if only minimal, help

(Proffit and White,1.970). Other postoperative growth studies of patients with

mandibular prognathism treated by early osteotomy (ages 9-72) have shown no

gross relapses (Knowles, 1,970).

Since the incidence of unfavourable results is definitely higher in young

patients than in adults, it must be assumed that growth plays an important role.

Vijayaraghavan et al. (7974) confirmed this concept and found that condylar

growth and mandibular posture were important factors producing relapse. The

ideas of delaying operating until the end of the growth period and detaching the

medial pterygoid muscle and the sphenomandibular ligament were offered to

minimise relapse" Freihofer (7982) has empirically stated that

maxillomandibular disharmonies of the Angle Class III type should not be

corrected before facial growth has been completed. The literature is replete in

supporting the clinical observation that surgery of the mandible in the growing

patient does not affect its subsequent growth potential (Cook and Hinrichsen,

7973; Egyedi et al. 1981). Clinically, this observation pre-empts that surgery in

patients presenting with mandibular prognathism before the completion of

growth would result in greater relapse than those who underwent surgery at the

completion of growth. On the contrary, there would be no relapse in the

growing patient presenting with a retrognathic mandible and the potential

growth would be welcome in these patients.

Page 92: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

92

Rosenquist et al. (1986), in their study assumed that completed mandibular

growth could be confirmed by radiographic examination of the hand and wrist

but this cannot be substantiated as mandibular growth continues after cessation

of growth in general. It is impossible to define precisely the end of the growth

period of the facial skeleton. Although some authors found that mandibular

growth is usually completed by the age of 20, (Bambha, 796'I..; Hunter, 1,966;

Nanda, 1955), it has also been stated that residual growth can be found beyond 20

years of age (Bjork, 7963; Tanner et aL.1966). Sorokolit and Nanda (1990) verified

completion of growth by the use of superimposition of serial cephalometric

raCicgraph tracing:.

Differences in growth between males and females are well known. Females

tend to commence and complete growth before males, with females

experiencing minimal growth changes after 74 or 15 years of age. Downs (1956)

remarked that males developed up until the early twenties. Brown et al. (1,971,)

and Grave and Brown (7976) determined that the peak age of facial growth

ranged from 13 to 13.8 years in males and from 1,'J,.7 to 72.2 years in females

(Figure 4.1).

Page 93: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

93

Figure 4.1 Average growth curves for males and females

(from Grave and Brown, 79761

BOYS8

4

&trl

¿,U

I

ÈUoJtu

FEItf¡E

6

10

2

10 11 12 13 t4 15 16 77 18

ACE - YEARS

GIRLS

Page 94: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

94

The timing of facial growth has very important clinical implications as it affects

the amount of relapse which can occur and is directly dependent on the residual

growth potential. Wolford et al. (1.978) reported that a major proportion of

growth is complete by age 9 years and 98Vo of growth completed by age 15 years

in girls. Boys attained 85% of growth by 9 years,90Vo by 13 years and 98Vo by 19

years of age.

Baum (1966) reviewed the effects of growth on the facial profile and Farrer (7984)

summarised these findings:

(i) Males coûunenced and finished growth later in life and tended to grow in

all directions whereas females grew between 8-L3 years and ceased growth

by 15 years of age.

(ii¡ At the end of growth, males attained a longer face whereas females

displayed deeper faces. Facial convexity flattened with age for both sexes

but the effect was greater in males.

(iii) The faces of 1,2 year old males underwent marked changes while faces of

1.2 year old females did not change significantly at adulthood except in

dimension.

The chin, formed from accessory cartilages associated with the ventral ends of

Meckel's cartilage, is very poorly developed in the infant. It is said to develop

as an independent unit of the mandible, influenced by sexual as well as genetic

factors (Sperber, 1,976). Sex differences in the symphyseal region of the

mandible are not significant in childhood but become more prominent during

adolescence. Enlow and Harris (196a) believed that the chin was "associated

with a generalised process of cortical recession in the flattened regions

Page 95: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

95

positioned between the canine teeth. The process involves a mechanism of

endosteal cortical growth". On the lingual surface behind the chin, heavy

periosteal growth occurs with dense bone merging and overlapping on the

labial side of the chin to produce its characteristic shape. Its prominence is

accentuated by bone resorption that occurs in the alveolar region above it,

creating the supramental concavity known as Point B. Particularly, in the

male, bony apposition at the symphysis seems to be the last change in shape of

the mandible and occurs some time between 16 and 23 years of age (Graber,

7972).

4.9.2 Hemimandibular elongation and hemimandibular hyperplasia

Pathological growth of the mandible can result in mandibular prognathism.

Several authors have made mention of the variety of pathological entities

which cause occlusal disturbances and dentofacial deformities as a result of

abnormal condylar growth (Norman and Painter, 1.980; Slootweg and Muller,

7986; Ianetti et al. 1989). Obwegeser and Makek (1986) stated that there are only

two basically distinct pathological malformations of the condyle,

hemimandibular hyperplasia and hemimandibular elongation. Pure and mixed

forms of both growth disturbances can occur and different pathophysiological

and histological patterns within the condyles are evident to account for these

growth disturbances. Hemimandibular hyperplasia is characterised by

enlargement of one side of the mandible with enlargement of the condyle,

condylar neck and the ascending and horizontal rami. A tilted occlusal plane

results from this type of abnormal growth. Hemimandibular elongation, in

contrast, is characterised by a horizontal displacement of the mandible plus chin

towards the unaffected side without tilting of the occlusal plane. Histologically,

hemimandibular hyperplasia displays a distinct proliferative fibrocartilaginous

layer distributed in a diffuse but regular manner all over the condylar head

Page 96: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

96

whereas in hemimandibular elongation, the pathological hyperactive condylar

focus is located in the centre of the condyle.

4.10 SINGLE JAW oercus BIMAXILLARY PROCEDURES

Combinations of prognathic and retrognathic upper and lower jaws require

bimaxillary surgery to be undertaken to achieve a satisfactory functional and

cosmetic result. Moser and Freihofer (1980) found that combined maxillary and

mandibular surgery was preferable to single jaw surgery as it gave a more

aesthetic improvement than did mandibular surgery alone, especially in severe

Class III deformities. Many studies have reported that in long term evaluation,

the position of the maxilla in the horizontal direction is stable but a variable

amount of vertical relapse occurs (Luyk and Ward Booth, 7985; Carlotti and

Schendel, 1987; Louis et al. 1,993). Other studies have confirmed similar results

of vertical maxillary relapse of about 40-50Vo (Kufner, 7977; Willmar, '1,974; BeIl,

7975; Bell and Scheideman, 1981). In a study by Kahnberg and Ridell (1988) in

which bimaxillary surgery was performed to correct prognathism, it was found

that maxiilary relapse occurred, and skeletal relapse of the mandible in both

vertical and horizontal directions was also evident but no more than in

mandibular surgery cases alone. Kahnberg and Ridell (1988) suggested that the

amount of mandibular relapse tends to be less in bimaxillary cases than in

mandibular surgery alone probably because the setback in bimaxillary cases is

proportioned between the maxilla and mandible, implying that the greater the

amount of mandibular setback, the greater the relapse potential. Franco et al.

(1989), in their study of bimaxillary cases in which the mandible was setback via

sagittal split osteotomy and rigidty fixed, found that the position and amount of

rotation of the proximal segment solely accounted for relapse in these

bimaxillary cases. In comparing both single jaw cases and bimaxillary cases the

mandible relapsed forwards (43.7 7o and 53.47o respectively) suggesting that there

Page 97: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

97

was minimal influence of the maxillary movement on the mandible. Even

though this is observation, it is important to recognise that the stability of the Le

Fort I procedure, in particular, in its vector components, influences mandibular

relapse. Examination of the total anterior facial height dictates that when

maxillary intrusion occurs in the postoperative period, a decrease in total facial

height occurs and consequently counter clockwise rotation of the mandible

occurs advancing Point B forward and hence "Íelapse" occurs. This was evident

in the bimaxillary cases of Franco's study (1989).

4.\1, CORONOIDECTOMY

Removal of the coronoid process has been advocated as an adjunct in the

surgical technique of mandibular setback. In patients with open bite, the

proximal and distal fragments, following oblique sliding osteotomy, are

approximated with a pronounced overlap at the superior ends of the cut for

which a coronoidectomy may assist in the posterior positioning of the distal

segment (Boyne 7966). Akin and Walters (1975) has also suggested that

coronoidectomy may be performed to gain better access and for better visibility

of the sigmoid notch although they maintain that they have never had to

undertake this exercise.

4.12 HIGH ANGLE MANDIBLES

An obtuse gonial is one of the characteristic features of mandibular prognathism

and it is desirable that the surgical treatment of the deformity also result in an

improved gonial angle. Different surgical procedures affect the gonial angle in

different ways. Jonsson (1981) studied the gonial angles in sagittal split

osteotomies and compared them to oblique sliding osteotomies. He found that

the gonial angle increased when treated by sagittal split osteotomy and decreased

Page 98: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

98

when treated by oblique sliding osteotomies. Explanations for the changes are

detailed in this study and an increase in gonial angle following sagittal split

osteotomy is possibly due to the effect of forward rotation of the proximal

segment thereby increasing the angle as well as resorptive changes in the gonial

region secondary to ischaemic necrosis of the proximal segment. It has been

reported that a negative correlation exists between the mandibular plane angle

and relapse of points gnathion and gonion. The same correlation also is true of

the cranial base angle and the changes in the "t'' co-ordinate of points gnathion

and gonion (Astrand and Ridell, 7973).

Kelsey (1968) demonstrated that the gonial angle undergoes changes following

vertical osteotomy of the ramus. Initially following operation, the gonial angle

is indeed reduced but surprisingly returns to its original, presurgical value. He

speculated that the locking forces of the occlusion stabilised the body of the

mandible during the healing and remodelling period while the effects of muscle

tension causes the proximal segment to be pulled anteriorly until it resumes its

functional and stable position. Shepherd (1980) studied the resorptive changes

of the mandible following different surgical techniques and found that the

vertical subsigmoid osteotomy displayed the greatest amount of resorption in

the region of gonion and the posterior border of the mandible. This resorption

was variable along the length of the ramus and resulted in narrowing of the

ramus in the anteroposterior direction owing to the gonial angle being

constructed at a tangent to the posterior border of the mandible and lower

border of the mandible. A^y resorptive changes to these areas of the mandible

will ultimately affect the gonial angle measurement.

Page 99: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

99

CHAPTER 5

CEPHALOMETRY

5.1. INTRODUCTION

Lateral skull cephalometric analysis is the standard method used in the

assessment of dentofacial deformity. Spatial changes of craniofacial structures

are usually evaluated by superimposition of radiographic cephalometric tracings

taken at different times and after identifying certain landmarks the changes

between cephalometric tracings are measured. This method of superimposition

allows for evaluation of cranial changes either in a cross sectional or

longitudinal (serial) manner and is an acceptable means of measuring the effects

of surgical manipulation of the facial skeleton (Brodie, 1955). In order to

evaluate facial changes, the structures on which the superimposition occurs

must remain stable and the landmarks be identifiable.

The accuracy of cephalograms is relative and not absolute. Various sources of

error are documented (Houston, 1,983; Buschang et al. 1,987) and various

methods have been employed to reduce possible errors (Bjork, 1947; Baumrind

and Frantz, 7971.a; Broch et al. 7987; Bondevik et al. ].987; Richardson, 7966;

Savara et al. 1966; Carlsson, 1967; Midtgard et aI.'1.974; and Bergin et aL. 7978).

The types of errors in experimentation are classified into systematic and random

errors. Systematic errors result from a permanent fault in the apparatus or from

its incorrect calibration. When a measurement is repeated several times, a

range of values that cluster about a particular value maybe obtained. Such

variations are due to random errors.

Page 100: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

100

The conventional process of recording data from lateral cephalograms involves

a number of steps, namely:

(i)

( ii)

(iii)

(iv)

(v)

taking of the lateral head radiograph;

tracing the cephalogram;

identification of landmarks;

recording the observation; and

measuring the observation.

In cephalometry, there are numerous potential sources of error and

undoubtedly these pertain to the methods of obtaining and recording data listed

above. Gravely and Murray Benzies (1,974) classified errors into two categories

which included "projection errors" and "tracing errors". They identify

projection errors as occurring due to the conversion of a three dimensional

object into a two dimensional radiograph and identify the factors that contribute

to this which include the relative positions of the x-ray tube, the object and the

film. Tracing errors arise as a result of any factor which limits the clarity of

cephalometric landmarks and include blurring of the image, lack of film

contrast and emulsion grain. Measurement errors such as pencil thickness and

parallax also contribute to tracing errors. Several authors have found that the

main source of error is in the reproducible identification of landmarks (Savara

et aL. 1966; Carlsson,7967; Midtgard et aL. 1974).

Given the method of obtaining and recording cephalometric data, errors can be

classified according to Hing (1989) into:

Page 101: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

101

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(iv)

(v)

(vi)

errors of projection;

errors of superimposition;

errors of landmark identification;

errors of digitising;

errors of measuremenf and

errors attributable to operator variability.

s.2 ERRORS OF PROIECTTON

Errors due to projection of the three dimensional object onto a two dimensional

film have been recognised by numerous authors (van Aken, '1,963; Salzmann,

1,964; Moyers and Bookstein, 7979; Ahlqvist et al. 1983). Carlsson (1.967)

identified a number of components in the total error of the cephalometric

procedure and defined these as being geometric errors and non geometric errors.

Geometric errors "arise in the projection of the skull and include the

enlargement, departures from parallelism between the median and film planes,

especially when the patient is fitted in the cephalostat, deviations in the position

of the focus in relation to an imaginary line through the ear rods and geometric

unsharpness due to the area of focus". There are also non geometric errors

which are predominantly associated with radiographic film properties,

positioning of the patient in the cephalostat and operator errors.

Various studies have been undertaken with the object of investigating these

errors, calculating the precision "(a quality associated with a Class of

observations and referring to the closeness of replicated or repeated observations

around a mean - Hallert '1,964)" and accuracy "(closeness of observations,

computations or estimates to the true values or values assumed to be true -

Hallert 1.964)" of the method under varying conditions and analysing the

Page 102: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

702

magnitude of the individual errors (Hatton and Grainger, 7958; Bjork and

Solow, 7962; van Aken, 1.963; Savara et al. 7966; Solow, 7966).

Enlargement and distortion in cephalometry is a result of the inherent property

of x-rays to proceed on straight lines diverging from the source or anode which

is a very small area or "point". Several techniques have been introduced to

compensate or eliminate enlargement (Pacini, 1922; Adams, 7940) and standard

tables are available to correct for these distortions. (Bergesen, 1980).

tarqet - obiect distance size of obiecttarget - film distance size of image

In addition to those factors elucidated by Carlsson(7967), head films are further

distorted by foreshortening of distances between points lying in different planes

and by radial displacement of all points and structures not on the principal axis.

Baumrind and Frantz, (7977a), Eliasson et al. (1982) and Ahlqvist et al. (1983) also

confirmed that major errors are associated with misalignment of the x-ray

source, the cephalostat, the film or the subject.

Although geometric errors of projection may be of significance, they are usually

considered to be of less importance than other errors (Bjork, 7974; Savara et al.

1,966; Carlsson, 1,967; Baumrind and Frantz, 7977; Houston et al, 1986). Ahlqvist

et al. (1986) studied the magnitude of projection errors on length measurements

in cephalometry and concluded that if the rotation of the object was less than 5o,

the error of the length measurements extrapolated to less than one percent.

Therefore, if lateral cephalograms were correctly and carefully taken, projection

errors could be minimised and be scientifically acceptable (Houston et al. 1,986;

Bjork, 7947; Solow, 1,966; Midtgard et at.1974; and Ahlqvist et al. 1986).

Page 103: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

103

5.3 ERRORS IN SUPERIMPOSITION

When comparing lateral head films taken at two or more time points two

approaches can be employed. These may be characterised as the individual film

method and the superimposition method. In the individual method, head

films at different times are individually analysed using the same set of

measurements and the measured values for one tracing are subtracted from

those of another tracing. These differences in values are then used as the

measures between the different time periods. Alternatively, the

superimposition method can be used. This involves placing two head films one

on top of the other, registered on some anatomic plane and assessing the

relative displacement of structures between time periods. The planes most

commonly used are the anterior cranial base, the line sella-nasion (registered on

sella), the palatal plane and the mandibular border.

Baumrind et al. (1.976) detailed the effects of primary and secondary errors when

tracings of lateral head radiographs are superimposed. Primary errors of

superimposition are biologically induced judgement errors in an attempt to

achieve biological best fit, therefore errors in a line segment result from

rotation, translation or a combined effect. Secondary errors are systematically

related to the primary errors as they are mathematically calculated from the

same variables.

Houston and Lee (1985) investigated the accuracy of different methods of

superimposition on cranial base structures. These included registration of

radiographs directlyj the blink method; the subtraction method; registrations of

tracings of the cranial base structures and of tracings on the sella nasion line,

registered at sella. Their findings showed that there were appreciable errors

associated with each method of superimposition but the method of

Page 104: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

704

superimposing on sella-nasion gave the lowest error. As a result of this

problem, they stressed the importance of clearly reporting the method error of

superimposition for all serial studies. Battagel (7993) also supported the idea of

performing and quantifying an error study for all cephalometric investigations.

To minimise registration errors, several authors have developed a number of

techniques. The use of fiducial landmarks, by punching holes in the radiograph,

is one of the acceptable methods of transferring registrations from one film to

another (Baumrind and Frantz, 1,971,a; Broch et al. 7987; McWilliarn, 1,982b;

Strabrun and Danielsen, 1,982; Vincent and West, 1,987). Vincent and West

(1987) used a specific registration method known as the Protocol Standard Film

Register Punch to minimise the registration error with superimposition but

concluded that each landmark investigated had envelopes of error characteristic

of each point. As this method required only one point to be digitised, the

potential error in superimposition was decreased.

Bjork and Solow (7962) investigated the effect of marking the reference points

on the radiograph prior to performing measurements and found that this

technique introduced another source of error. It could also be shown that if

measurements were performed accurately, the registration errors were of the

same order of magnitude, whether or not the reference points were marked in.

Sluiter et al. (1985) introduced a new method of superimpositioning,by using

computer technology aided by simple mathematical calculations. They

eliminated the use of punch holes serving as fiducial landmarks by employing

the physical dimensions of each radiograph or tracing itself and using computer

transformations to calculate the vector of displacement and rotation of the

second film compared to the first. The magnitude of error was reported to be

much lower than by other methods.

Page 105: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

105

5.4 ERRORS OF LANDMARK IDENTIFICATION

Baumrind and Frantz (1977a) consider errors of identification to be the second

general class of errors in head film measurements. These are the errors

involved in the apparently straightforward process of identifying specific

anatomic landmarks on lateral head films. These authors, reportedly, were also

the first to undertake the task of directing studies toward quantitation of errors

in landmark identification. The fact that errors occur has generated an

enormous amount of discussion on the topic (Bjork, 1947; Hixon, 1,956; Hatton

and Grainger/ 1958; Miller et al. 1,966; Richardson, 7966; Savara, et al. 1,966;

Brown et al. 1,970; van der Linden, 7977; Midtgard et al. 7974; Broch et al. "1987;

Richardson, 7981.; Strabrun and Danielsen, 1982; Houston, 1.983; Phillips et al.

79M; Chate, 1987; Savage et al. 1.987; Vincent and West, 7987).

Numerous authors have exposed the greatest source of random error in head

film measurements to be the identification of landmarks and the inaccuracy of

landmark identification (Graber, 7958; Miller et al. 7966; Houston, 7983; Chate,

7987). Broch et al. (1981) have even been bold enough to suggest that if all

digitising equipment and instrumentation is in order, and the machinery is

correctly operated, then the only source of error is in landmark identification.

The reliability of landmark identification depends on five factors:

(i)

(ii)

(iii )

characteristics of the cranial structures;

the general quality of the headplate;

blurring of the anatomical structures caused by secondary radiation or

movement during exposure;

precision of the recording method; and

accuracy of the operator.

(iv)

(v)

Page 106: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

706

The magnitude of error was noted to vary greatly from landmark to landmark

but fortunately, the distribution of errors for each landmark had its own

characteristic and usually elliptical envelope of error which varied from 0.25

mm to several millimetres (Richardson, 'l.,966; Baumrind and Frantz, 7977a;

Broch et al. 1981). It has been reported that the error due to the variability of

location of landmarks was about five times that due to measurement (Savara et

aL.1966).

In order to reduce the error associated with landmark identification,

xeroradiography, the process of recording a latent radiographic image on a

selenium coated aluminium plate, was trialed by Hurst et al. (1978) to assess its

feasibility. The conclusion drawn from this study favoured only four of

fourteen landmarks to be more easily identifiable on xeroradiography and the

remaining landmarks were more accurately identified on the conventional

cephalogram.

To reduce errors in identification of landmarks, Houston (1983) recommended

that duplicate tracings be made and in particular that the landmarks are

identified on each tracing and averaged rather than the measurements

replicated and averaged. Baumrind and Miller (1980) suggested that tracings be

repeated four times which would then halve the random error. Computer

based digitising would also be of help in reducing the tedium of multiple

tracings. Eriksen and Solow (1991.) have reiterated that the error in landmark

identification can be reduced somewhat by thorough definitions of the reference

points, by u good knowledge of radiographic anatomy, and by a high image

quality of the radiographic films.

It was common belief that a time interval between the first and second

determination of the same tracing initiated a high degree of error. A number of

Page 107: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

707

authors have disproved this assumption as well as showing that no difference

has been apparent when measurements have been carried out on lateral head

films taken on different tracings on separate occasions (Richardson, '1.966;

Baumrind and Frantz, 197'l,a; Midtgard et al. 1,974). The importance of routine

double determinations was considered less important by Brown (1,973) provided

that the measuring techniques were carefully scrutinised and an intraobserver

replicability study had been performed to assess the variability of error.

5.5 ERRORS OFDIGMSING

The errors related to the recording procedure comprise two components. The

first is the precision with which a marked point on the radiograph or tracing can

be identified by the cross hair of the recording device, usually about * 0.1 mm,

and the second is related to the errors of the digitising system. It has been

shown that direct digitising of the anatomic reference points from the

radiographs is more reproducible than digitising of the anatomic points from

tracings of the radiographs (Richardson, 1987; Cohen, 79M; Flouston, 1.982;

Sandler, 1988).

A number of researchers have remarked that when a digitiser is used, the only

source of error is in landmark identification (Bergin et al. 1978; Broch et al. 1,981.;

Bondevik et al. 7981.; Richardson, 1981). However, Eriksen and Solow (1991,)

have brought attention to the precision and linearity of the digitising tablet.

Errors of linearity are caused by the distortion of the x and y co-ordinates of the

digitising tablet due to the electromagnetic fields over the entire surface not

being homogenous. If a digitising system is not linear, a given line segment will

be recorded as having different lengths depending on where it is placed on the

digitising surface.

Page 108: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

108

In a study comparing traditional and computerised methods of cephalometric

analysis, Richardson (1981) found that overall, the traditional methods were

slightly inferior to those obtained by the digitiser but for some digitised

landmarks, the traditional method produced more accurate results. Two

advantages of the digitiser were noted. The digitiser was able to offer speed in

preparation of the computer analysis as well as being able to locate extremal

points better, e.g. "most anterior", "most posterior", "highest" or "lowest"

points.

Errors in digitisation of selected points have been shown to be of the order of

less than 0.1. mm whereas the process of manually measuring is associated with

an error of approximately 0.5 mm in each of the two planes of space (Bondevik

et al. 1981).

5.6 ERRORS OF MEASUREMENT

Since the major component of recording error is that of point identification,

some authors believe there is little to choose between direct digitising and the

use of an intervening tracing stage (Cohen, 1,9M; Sandler, 1988). Others are of

the opinion that digitising procedures offer the greater advantage in minimising

measurement errors (Broch et al. 1981.; Bondevik et al. 1931). Battagel (7993)

remarked that the results of a cephalometric study should be interpreted in

relation to its associated measurement error and in a study comparing different

methods of error assessment, Dahlberg's estimation proved to be the soundest

method, mathematically, to evaluate measurement error.

In a study by Carlsson (1,967), it was found that measurement error and the

various geometric and technical radiographic errors were small. In an analysis

of the measurement methods, it could be shown that the precision of

Page 109: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

709

measurements was significantly greater in two areas, for callipers than for those

measured with a ruler, and if the measurements were estimated to one tenth

than to one half a degree or millimetre. Bjork (7947) found that errors in

measurements of lateral head films arose from other sources of error, namely

projection error, landmark identification errors, and mechanical errors in

drawing lines and in the use of rulers and protractors.

Midtgard et al. (1974) stated that the size of errors of distance measurements

through calculation of the accidental error between double determinations was

insufficient. There was a necessity to determine the variance of the error as a

percentage of the total variance and should not exceed 37o.

Enlargement and distortion of a radiograph is an inherent characteristic of

cephalometry. Consequently, variable enlargement of 4.6% to 7.2% in the lateral

film and from 0.37o to 9.2Vo in the frontal film affects cephalometric

measurements. Bergesen (1980) devised a method to compensate for

enlargement and distortion of radiographs and has constructed compensation

tables to allow accurate interpretation of tracings. From this study, it was found

that errors in all measu¡ed planes did not exceed 0.7Vo.

5.7 THE SELECTION OF A SUITABLE LINE OF REFERENCE

Cephalometry involves the comparison of either serial or longitudinal

radiographs. This is achieved by superimposition of either radiographs or

tracings derived from radiographs. In order to superimpose the details, an ideal

line of reference is necessary (Steiner,1953; Wei, 1,968) and should:

Page 110: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

110

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

superimpose easily;

remain perfectly stable despite growth; and

be based on reference points which are easily identifiable and

consequently have a minimal envelope of error.

A number of reference lines have been investigated to determine the ideal

reference line (Figure 5.1) and include:

(i) Frankfort horizontal

This line passes through the centre of each auditory meatus and lower

margin of the respective orbits (Finlay, 1980).

(ii) Nasion - Sella line (Broadbent Line)

This line extends from nasion, the most anterior point on the nasofrontal

suture, to sella, the midpoint of the sella turcica (Krogman,7957).

(iii) SN7 line

This line is a surrogate line with origin based either on sella or nasion

and angulated 70 to the nasion-sella line but affords the advantages of

reorientating the head so that the influence of extremal landmarks is

minimised.

A comprehensive review of these lines has been recorded by Hing (1989). He

concluded that the nasion-sella line is favoured for its ease of location and its

low method error when it is used for superimposition.

Page 111: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

111

Figure 5.1 Reference lines (Hing,1989)

S

Nasion-Sella Line

SN-7 Line

Frankfort HorizontalPo Or

Page 112: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

112

III

MATERIALS AND METHODS

Page 113: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

113

CHAPTER 6

EVALUATION OF POST SURGICAL RELAPSE

6.1, SELECTION OF PATIENT RECORDS

The names of all patients who had undergone a vertical subsigmoid osteotomy

for the treatment of mandibular prognathism were retrieved from the general

theatre operating records since the time this procedure was introduced into the

Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Unit (1983). Fifty three patients with the

diagnosis of mandibular prognathism were treated at the Royal Adelaide

Hospital between April 1983 and July 1992 by six consultants and lL registrars

who all followed the same operative procedure. The patient sample was drawn

from a biased population in South Australia. Only patients holding a health

care card were eligible for treatment (school students, unemployed people with

sickness benefits and those without private hospital insurance). This meant

that socioeconomic factors influenced their selection of the patient population.

Cephalometric radiographs were retrieved from patient files held either in the

Records Department or in the Orthodontic Deparhnent.

Cephalometric records were accepted for study if the following criteria were met

(i) at least one year postoperative follow-up;

(ii) surgery was limited to vertical subsigmoid osteotomy alone or combined

with a maxillary osteotomy;

(iii) availability of lateral head cephalometric radiographs preoperatively and

at arbitrarily defined postsurgical intervals:

Page 114: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

774

T1

T2

T3:

T4:

T5:

T6:

T7:

pre orthodontic treatment

at completion of orthodontic treatment

immediate postoperatively (within 7 days)

six weeks postoperatively

either three to six months postoperatively, whichever was

available

twelve months postoperatively

the most recent lateral head cephalogram taken at least 24 months

postoperatively.

Of the 53 patients who underwent surgical treatment, a total of 24 patients were

accepted into the study. The remainder of the patient records were excluded for

the following reasons:

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(iv)

incomplete radiographic records necessary for detailed analysis (n:26);

syndromic patients with physical disabilities (n=1);

unilateral vertical subsigmoid osteotomy and unilateral sagittal split

osteotomy for treatment of mandibular asymmetry (n=1); and

craniofacial anomalies requiring extensive surgery (n=1).

155

Therefore, the number of lateral head cephalograms available for analysis was

Nineteen of the patients received presurgical and postsurgical orthodontic

treatment through the Department of Orthodontics at the Adelaide Dental

Hospital. The remaining five patients in the study received no orthodontic

treatment and therefore had arch bars (with cleats) ligated to the teeth at the

time of surgery. These were used for both the surgical procedure as well as

maxillomandibular fixation at the end of the surgical procedure. All patients

Page 115: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

115

had a mandibular setback using the vertical subsigmoid procedure. Other

surgical procedures were performed on the 24 patients in conjunction with the

vertical subsigmoid procedure (Table 6.1).

Table 6.1 Procedures performed in conjunction with vertical

subsigmoid osteotomy (VSSO)

The records were assigned to the one of the following groups:

I.

il.

III.

IV.

Le Fort I ,/vertical subsigmoid osteotomy

Segmental Le Fort I /vertical subsigmoid osteotomy

Quadrangular Le Fort Il,/vertical subsigmoid osteotomy

Vertical subsigmoid osteotomy only

(N=14)

(N=6)

(N=2)

(N=2)

The age at which each patient underwent surgery was calculated from the date

of birth to the nearest month and expressed in years (Table 6.2).

13

6

1

2

2

24

VSSO + Le Fort I

VSSO + Le Fort I (segmental)

VSSO + Le Fort I + genioplasty

VSSO + Le Fort II + genioplasty

VSSO only

TOTAL

NUMBER OF PATIENTSPROCEDURE

Page 116: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

11.6

Table 6.2 Age at operation

6.2 RADTOGRAPHTCTECHNTQUE

Radiographs were taken by the Radiology department at the Dental Hospital

using TMAT6, Ortho M or Cronex Lodose or Fuji double emulsion film. When

the patient presented for lateral head cephalogram it was customary to request a

barium soft tissue marker to outline the soft tissue profile. This barium

sulphate was painted on the patient's face in the midsagittal plane prior to

taking the radiograph. With new soft tissue collimators, the barium paint was

discarded as soft tissue outline was much more pronounced and required no

highlighting with the paint. The film, selected at the discretion of the

radiographer, was inserted into a Kodak Lanex regular cassette with a Kodak

Lanex regular screen. The cassettes were slotted into a Kodak Lanex film

holder. The distance between the film and mid sagittal plane was standardised

at'I..6 centimetres for all cases.

A standardised technique for lateral head cephalograms was followed (Farrer

1,984). The patients were gently positioned by a Lumex cephalostat

(Copenhagen) in the Frankfort horizontal plane whilst standing upright. An

aluminium wedge filter was aligned with the soft tissues of the face. Head

orientation was checked by using vertical and horizontal light beams projected

onto mirrors from the machine. Patients were instructed to bite gently on their

back teeth and asked to maintain a relaxed lip posture (Burstone, 1.967;

43.4

20.8

44.7

59.4

36.1,

59.4

76

15.3

15.3

11.9

7.7

9.8

22.9

23.2

23.0

72

72

24

Male

Female

TOTAL

RANGEMAXIMUMMINIMUMSTANDARD

DEVIATION

MEANAGE

(YEARS)

NUMBERSEX

Page 117: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

177

Hiltesund et al. 1,978). Radiation was generated by a Philips super 50 CPl80 CP

microprocessor - controlled unit. A Kodak RP X-OMat film processor and

subsequently a Fuji FPM 21.00 x-ray processor was used to process the films

automatically. The enlargement factor (Figure 6.1) was calculated by Farrer

(79U) in a previous study using the same facilities.

Page 118: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

118

Figure 6.L Calculation of the enlargement factor for points lying on the

mid-sagittal plane (Hing, 1989)

FM A

Xl* Y

Z

F: Film plane

M = Mid-sagittal plane

A = Focus

X=160mm

Y = 1818 mm

Z = 7978 mm

E = Enlargement Factor

E = 100 xV- 1)

Y

=100x 7978 -11818

= 8.8To

Page 119: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

L79

6.3 TRACING AND DIGITISING PROCEDURE

Each of the 155 radiographs were placed over a fluorescent light box in a

darkened room with exclusion of extraneous light by placing a black cardboard

frame around the perimeter of the lateral head cephalogram. An acetate sheet

was secured to the radiograph with cellulose tape at the top and bottom margins

such that the hard tissue profile was encompassed. Hard tissue details were

then identified and recorded on the acetate sheet with a sharp HB pencil. A ten

centimetre line was constructed on the presurgical radiograph seven degrees to

the nasion-sella line with origin at sella turcica. The location of each

cephalometric point was determined with the film orientated to the SN-7 line

(Figure 6.2).

A mandibular template from the presurgical film was used to transfer points

condylion (Co), Menton (Me), pogonion (Po) and Down's Point B to maintain

the relative position of extremal points. Where an occlusal wafer was secured

during operation, postoperative radiographs were corrected by rotating a

mandibular template at hinge axis (HA) until the lower incisal tips contacted the

upper incisal tips. This eliminated the anticlockwise rotation of the mandible

following removal of the occlusal wafer.

The acetate tracings from each radiograph were secured by cellulose tape and

then digitised on a Haalett Packard 9874A digitiser configured to an Apple IIe

computer. Tracings were orientated to the SN-7 line on the digitiser tablet. The

software program, Cephs, developed for cephalometric research by Brown

(personal 7986, communication), was programmed to record individual patient

details, accept each digitised record and transform these digitised points into

cartesian co-ordinates relative to the SN-7 line with origin at sella turcica.

Alphanumeric data relating patient details and the magnification factor were

Page 120: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

120

entered. Magnification of 8.8% was not corrected. Each nominated point was

centrally aligned in the large window cross hair cursor and registered by

depressing a perimeter button on the cursor. Data was transformed

automatically by the computer and saved to disk for editing. All tracing and

digitising procedures were carried out by the one person over a number of

sittings.

Page 121: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

121

Figure 6.2 Hard and soft tissue points lísted in order of digitising sequence

(modified from Hing, 1989)

S SN-7

Co OrPo

0 . FIA

ANSPNS A

MSMI tr

AI B

IS^aGOt

Hy

1.

LJ.

45.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.11.

72.

S SellaN NasionPo PorionOr OrbitaleCo CondylionHA Hinge axisAr ArticulareGo GonionMe MentonPg PogonionB Down's Point B or supramentaleAI Lower incisal apex

13.

74.15.

76.77.18.

79.20.2t.22.

23.24.

IIIS

ASAANSPNSMSMIHyAPPPG/2

Lower incisal edgeUpper incisal edgeUpper incisal apexDown's Point A or subspinaleAnterior nasal spine or acanthionPosterior nasal spineUpper molar crownLower molar crownHyoidAnterior pharyngeal wallPosterior pharyngeal wallCervical vertebrae 2

Page 122: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

122

6.4 REFERENCE POINTS AND LINES

Reference points and reference lines (Figures 6.2 and 6.3; Figures 8 and 9)

throughout the text were selected from the thesis as formulated by Hing (1989)

which were derived from the Adelaide Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Unit

handbook (1983) and from the Quick CephrM manual (1986). A number of

points and variables have been amended to suit the requirements of the study.

Cephalometric points which relied on bilateral radiographic structures (porion,

orbitale, pterygoid, condylion and gonion) were taken as the midpoint where

the two images did not coincide.

6.4.7 Hard and soft tissue points (figure 6.2)

Sella (S): The centre of the pituitary fossa of the sphenoid bone determined by

inspection (van der Linden, 7977; Vincent and West,1987).

Nasion (N): The most anterior point of the frontonasal suture (Brown, 1,973).

Porion (Po): The most superior point on the external auditory meatus (Koski

and Virolainen, 1,956; Ricketts, 1,979; Savara and Takeuchi, 1979; Pancherz and

Flansen, 1,984; Wolford, Hilliard and Dugan, 1985; Blaseio, 1986; Vincent and

West, 1,987). The external auditory meatus has three radiolucent areas which

distinguish it from the internal auditory meatus: the fenestrum vestibulae

superiorlli the fenestrum cochlea posteriorly; and the promontory anteriorly

(Yen, 1960).

Orbitale (Or): The lowest point on the average of the right and left borders of the

bony orbit (Riolo et aL.1,974).

Condylion (Co): The most superior point on the head of the condyle (Tracy and

Savara, 1,966; Sekiguchi and Savara, '1,972; Brown, 1,973; Lake et al. 7981';

McNamara, 1.984; Smith et al. 1985). Several authors, notably Björk and Palling

(1954') have defined condylion as the most supero-posterior point on the head of

Page 123: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

723

the condyle. It is determined as the point of tangency to a perpendicular

construction line to the anterior and posterior borders of the condylar head.

Condylion, therefore, is located as the most superior axial point of the condylar

head rather than as the most superior point on the condyle (Riolo et al. 7974).

Hinge axis (HA) or condyle: Centre of the condylar head determined by

inspection (Blaseio, 7986). Kohn (1978) defined the point condyle as the centre of

the head of the condyloid process.

Articulare (Ar): The point at the junction of the contour of the external cranial

base and the dorsal contour of the condylar processes projected in the

midsagittal plane (Wei, 7965; Brown, 7973).

Gonion (Go): The point of intersection of the line tangent to the lower border

and a line through articulare and the posterior border of the ramus (Kelsey,

7968). This point is identified on the proximal fragment of the mandible

following surgery and is extensively variable from radiograph to radiograph as

the proximal fragment is free floating during the healing phase.

Menton (Me): The most inferior point on the symphyseal outline (Riolo et al.

7974).

Pogonion (Pg): The most anterior point on the contour of the bony chin relative

to a perpendicular to SN-7 plane (Riolo et aL.7974).

Down's Point B or supramentale (B): The deepest point in the midsagittal plane

between infradentale and pogonion, usually anterior to and slightly below the

apices of the mandibular incisors (Burstone, 1.978). According to Moyers (1987)

Point B cannot be determined if the chin profile is flat.

Lower incisal apex (AI): The root tip of the mandibular central incisor (Riolo et

aL.1974).

Lower incisal edge (II): The incisal tip of the mandibular central incisor (Riolo et

aL.1974).

Upper incisal edge (IS): The incisal tip of the maxillary central incisor (Riolo et

aL.7974).

Page 124: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

124

Upper incisal apex (AS): The root tip of the maxillary central incisor (Riolo et al.

7974).

Down's Point A or subspinale (A): The deepest point in the midsagittal plane

between the anterior nasal spine and supradentale, usually around the level of

and anterior to the apex of the maxillary central incisors (Burstone,7978).

Anterior nasal spine or acanthion (ANS): The tip of the median sharp bony

process of the maxilla at the lower margin of the anterior nasal opening (Riolo

et aL.1974).

Posterior nasal spine (PNS): The most posterior point at the sagittal plan on the

bony hard palate (Riolo et aL.7974).

Upper molar crown (MS): The distal contact (height of contour) of the maxillary

first molar relative to the occlusal plane (Riolo at al. 7974).

Lower molar crown (MI): The distal contact (height of contour) of the

mandibular first molar relative to the occlusal plane (Riolo et al. 1.974).

Hyoid (Hy): The most superoanterior point on the body of the hyoid bone

(Athanisou et al. 7991).

Cervical vertebrae 2 (CvZlz The most anteroinferior point on the corpus of the

second cervical vertebrae (Athanisou et al. 1991).

Anterior pharyngeal wall (AP): The anterior pharyngeal wall along the line

intersecting the most anteroinferior point of the corpus on the second cervical

vertebrae and the point hyoid (Athanisou et al, 1997).

Posterior pharyngeal wall (PP): The posterior pharyngeal wall along the line

intersecting the most anteroinferior point of the corpus on the second cervical

vertebrae and the point hyoid (Athanisou et al. 7997).

Page 125: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

125

6.4.2 Cephalometric lines (fisure 6.3)

Nasion-sella line (NSL): A line passing through nasion and sella (Solow, 7966).

Sella-nasion-7 (SN-7): A line constructed by drawing a line 7" to SN plane with

its origin at sella as described by Marcotte (1981). Burstone (7978) refers to SN-7

as a surrogate Frankfort plane with its origin at nasion.

Frankfort horizontal (FH): The line passing through porion and orbitale (Scott,

1,e67).

Mandibular line or plane (ML): A line drawn through menton and gonion.

This line has also been defined as the tangent to the lower border of the

mandible or a line joining gonion and gnathion (Salzmann, 1960).

Functional occlusal line (FOL): A line averaging the points of posterior occlusal

contact from the first permanent molars to the first premolars (Moyers, 1,987).

Page 126: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

726

Figure 6.3 Cephalometric lines (Hing, L989)

S

Nasion-Sella Line

SN-7 Line

Frankfort Horizontal

Occlusal Line

Mandibular Line

Po

MS

MI

Or

Me

Ar

IS

Co

Page 127: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

727

6.4.3 Calculation of linear and angular variables

The variables were selected from those reported by Kohn (1978), Lake et al. (1981)

and Athanasiou (1997). A second program by Brown (personal communication,

7986), Neu) Scorer, was used to compute all measurements. A menu within the

program allows a variety of combinations between any of the digitised points.

Fourteen linear and eight angular variables (Figure 6.4) were calculated from the

digitised points and stored as disk files. The files were transferred from an

Apple IIGS computer to an Apple Macintosh SE computer via Mac Transfer L.01

(Southeøstern Software, 1.984) for final editing and statistical evaluation.

Lineør oøriables

Anterior facial height (AFH): The distance between menton and nasion

perpendicular to the SN-7 line.

Posterior facial height (PFH): The distance between gonion and sella

perpendicular to the SN-7 line.

Condylar displacement horizontal (S-HAx): The horizontal distance between

sella turcica and hinge axis perpendicular to the SN-7 line.

Condylar displacement vertical (S-HAy): The vertical distance between sella

turcica and hinge axis perpendicular to the SN-7 line.

Point A horizontal (Ax): The distance between Down's Point A and a line

drawn perpendicular to nasion-sella 7line.

Point A vertical (Ay): The distance between Down's Point A and a line drawn

perpendicular to nasion-sella T line passing through Sella turcica.

Point B horizontal (Bx): The distance between Down's Point B and a line drawn

perpendicular to nasion-sella 7 line.

Point B vertical (By): The distance between Down's Point B and a line drawn

perpendicular to nasion-sella 7 line through Sella turcica.

Page 128: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

128

Overjet (OJ): The distance between IS and II measured parallel to the occlusal

plane.

Overbite (OB): The distance between IS and II measured perpendicular to the

occlusal plane.

Hy point horizontal (Hyx): The distance between the most superoanterior point

of the hyoid bone and a line drawn perpendicular to nasion-sella line.

Hy point vertical (Hyy): The distance between the most superoanterior point of

the hyoid bone and a line drawn perpendicular to nasion-sella line through

sella turcicà.

Pharyngeal depth IAP-PP (x)]: The distance between the anterior pharyngeal

wall and the posterior pharyngeal wall measured in the horizontal direction

between the hyoid point and the cervical vertebrae 2 point.

Pharyngeal depth IAP-PP (y)l: The distance between the anterior pharyngeal

wall and the posterior pharyngeal wall measured in the vertical direction

between the hyoid point and the cervical vertebrae 2 point.

Angular aariables

Mandibular plane angle (SNGoMe): The angle formed between nasion-sella

line and the mandibular line.

SNB: The angle formed between nasion-sella line and a line drawn through

nasion and Down's Point B.

Gonial angle (ArGoMe): The angle formed by a line tangent to the mandibular

ramus and the mandibular plane.

Ramal angle (SNArGo): The angle formed between nasion-sella line and the

line Ar-Go.

Upper incisor angle (MxL-SN7): The angle between SN7 and a line drawn

through IS and AS.

Interincisal angle (IIA): The angle between the line IS-AS and the line II-AL.

Page 129: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

729

Lower incisor angle (IMPA): the angle between the mandibular line and the

line II-AI.

Figure 6.4 Angular and linear variables used to evaluate dentoskeletal

changes following vertical subsigmoid osteotomy

SNA¡Go S SN-7

SNGoMe

A (",y)

B (^,y)

Hy(t,y)

0

IS

Linea¡ va¡iablesAnterior facial height (AFH)Posterior facial height (PFH)Condylar displacement horizontal (SHAx)Condylar displacement vertical (SHAy)Point A horizontal (Ax)Point A vertical (Ay)Point B horizontal (Bx)

Point B vertical (By)OverjetOverbiteHy point horizontal (Hyx)Hy point vertical (Hyy)Pharyngeal depth horizontal [AP-PP (x)]Pharyngeal depth vertical IAP-PP (y)ì

Angular variablesMandibular plane angle (SNGoMe)SNBSNAConial angle (ArGoMe)Ramal angle (SNArCo)Uppur incisor angleInterincisal angleI¡wer incisal angle

a

PFH

(*,y)

Page 130: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

130

6.5 STATISTICAL ANALYSIS

Each variable within the four groups was assessed by the mean value, standard

error and minimum and maximum value using Stataiew SE 1.03 (Abacus

Concepts Inc., 1988). The differences between each period T1 to T5 for t}:.e 22

variables were calculated by Statview SE., The Student's ú-test for paired and

unpaired values was used to determine the significance of differences for each

variable (Table 6.3).

Table 6.3 Statistical analysis of mandibular relapse following vertical

subsigmoid osteotomy

ï Mean IxN

sse Standard error of the mean

r Correlation coefficient

t Student's unpaired t-test

/N

I (x-Ð (y-f)

> fr."l'(y-y)'

(x1-x2)

[r,.,,' +f'] . [t(*,)2 +,'1

.IH,*']

2 Nr+Nz-z

Page 131: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

73't

where N

S

x,y

X1

x2

= number of determinations

= standard deviation

= observed scores

= mean of the group 1 observations

= mean of the group 2 observations

Page 132: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

1,32

CHAPTER 7

ERRORS OF THE METHOD

7.1. MATERIALS AND METHODS

To establish the validity of results in this study, an assessment of the magnitude

of cephalometric errors was necessary. The magnitude of error associated with

tracing, superimposition and digitising was assessed by a series of double

determinations for ten cephalograms from three cases. These were randomly

selected from the radiographic files of the Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Unit,

The University of Adelaide.

Repeat tracing, superimposition and digitising were separated by one week and

re-recorded by one observer. Tracings were orientated to the SN-7 line on the

digitiser tablet and secured with cellulose tape. Alphanumeric data relating tape

details and magnification compensation were entered. Magnification of 8.8%

(Farrer, 7984) was not corrected. Twenty four tissue points and two fiducial

points (x and x') were digitised on a Heu¡lett Packard 987A digitiser configured to

an Apple IIe computer (Figure 7.1). Each nominated point was centrally aligned

in the large window cross-hair cursor and registered by depressing a perimeter

button. Data was transformed automatically by the computer and saved to disk

for editing. The cephalometric software program developed by Professor

Tasman Brown, The University of Adelaide, computes transformations of the

cartesian coordinates relative to a nominated reference line. The line formed by

x-x' served as the line of reference. The computer was also programmed to

perform superimpositions using the first fiducial point (x) as the point of

registration. Error associated with the digitising equipment has been critically

Page 133: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

133

assessed by Farrer (7984). The total error from the Hewlett Packard digitiser was

+ 0.01 mm under normal operating conditions.

Figure 7.1 Hard and soft tissue points listed in order of digitising sequence

(modified from Hing, 1989)

a.-4

x'x

aOLrO

fiducial point 1

fiducial point 2

SellaNasionPorionOrbitaleCondylionHinge axisArticul¡areGonionMentonPogonionDown's Point B or supramentale

SN-7

Or

IS

AI B

l.ower incisal apexLower incisal edgeUpper incisal edgeUpper incisal apexDown's Point A or subspinaleAnterior nasal spine or acanthionPosterior nasal spineUpper molar crownLower molar crownHyoidAnterior pharyngeal wallPosterior pharyngeal wallCerrrical vertebrae 2

S

CoPo

0 a

PNSANSA

MSMI

Hy

1.

LJ.

45.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.11.

t213.

X

x'S

NPoOrCoFIAAIGoMePgB

74.15

76.77.18.

79.20.2r.22.

?3.

24.25.26.

AIIIISASAANSPNSMSMIHyAPPPC'12

Page 134: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

Scattergrams were produced to illustrate the reproducibility of each point using

the method described by Broach et al. (1981). The first reading for each point was

arbitrarily assigned as origin. The individual points on the scattergram

represented the difference between the first and second cephalogram indicating

the dispersion of the location errors.

The differences between the first and second determination were expressed as

the mean difference (M diff), the standard error of the mean difference E (M

difÐ, the standard deviation of a single determination (S error) and the

percentage of the observed variance attributable to errors following the

procedure of Dahlberg (19a0). The Student's f-test for paired values was used to

assess whether the differences differed significantly from zero at the 5To (t=2.262)

and'L%o (t=3.250) levels for 9 degrees of freedom. Table 7.1 lists the respective

formulae.

TableTJl. Statistical analysis of the experimental error

M aff Mean difference between two determinations t ¿iff

E (M ¿i¡9 Standard error of the mean difference

N

s ¿in

S (error) Standard deviation of a singledeviation (Dahlbert, 1940)

> diÍf.'

734

2S (error) xL0

S2

M¿in

.^-

2N

VoEvar. Error variance per cent

t value Student's paired t-test

E (Mdifo

Page 135: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

135

where diff =

N=

2N=e2J

difference between two determinations

number of double determinations

number of single determinations

observed variance of the measurement

Page 136: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

736

IV

RESULTS

Page 137: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

737

CHAPTER 8

RESULTS: EARLY,INTERMEDIATE AND LONG TERM DENTOSKELETAL

EFFECTS FOLLOWING VERTICAL SUBSIGMOID OSTEOTOMY

8.1. INTRODUCTION

Initial examination of the data involved analysis of the horizontal movement

of Point B for each group and its subsequent relapse.

The following groups were used:

I. Le Fort I osteotomy/vertical subsigmoid osteotomy.

II. Segmental Le Fort I osteotomy/vertical subsigmoid osteotomy.

m. Quadrangular Le Fort II osteotomy/vertical subsigmoid osteotomy.

IV. Vertical subsigmoid osteotomy only.

8.2 ANALYSIS OF VARIABLE BY GROUPS

Group I. Le Fort I/VSSO (N = 14)

The mean mandibular setback of point B (T2-T3) for this group was -5.29 mm t1.08 mm. The long term relapse following this movement was measured as a

further backward shift of -0.07 mm + 0.5 mm from time period T3 to TZ but this

shift was not statistically significant (Table 8.1).

Page 138: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

138

Table 8.1 Comparison of relapse at point B(x) for Group I

* statistically significant (p < 0.01)

II.

The mean mandibular setback of point B (T2-T3) for this group was -2.85 mm *

0.94 mm. The long term shift following this movement was measured as a

further mandibular backward shift of -0.98 mm * 0.55 mm from time period T3

to T7 but this shift was not statistically significant (Table 8.2).

Table 8.2 Comparison of relapse at point B(x) for Group II

Group III. Ouadrangular Le Fort IIIVSSO (N=2)

The mean mandibular setback of point B (T2-T3) for this group was -8.67 mm *

7.8 mm. The long term relapse following this movement was measured as a

relapse of mandibular setback of +0.59 mm * 0.32 mm from time period T3 to T7

but this shift was not statistically significant (Table 8.3).

I

< 0.001*

0.63

0.89

4.90

0.50

0.14

-5.291 1.08

{.29r 0.58

{.07 + 0.5

T2-T3

T3-T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYT-VALUESHIFT (mm)TIMEPERIOD

0.03

0.18

0.13

3.02

1,.67

7.79

-2.85+ 094

{.80r 0.50

{.9810.55

T2-T3

T3-T6

T3-W

PROBABILITYú-VALUESHIFT (mm)TIMEPERIOD

Page 139: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

739

Table 8.3 Comparison of relapse at point B(x) for Group III

Grouo IV. VSSO onlv (N=2)

The mean mandibular setback of point B (T2-T3) for this group was -5.99 mm *

0.07 mm. The long term relapse following this movement was measured as a

relapse of +0.67 mm * 1.04 mm for time period T3 to T7 but this shift was not

statistically significant (Table 8.4).

Table 8.4 Comparison of relapse at point B(x) for Group IV

8.2.7 Horizontal mandibular movement at point B

The results for each group, all of which had vertical subsigmoid osteotomy,

were compared for relapse from immediate postoperative (T3) to long term

postoperative (T7) time period in both horizontal and vertical directions by

Student's f-test for unpaired values (Tables 8.5 and 8.6). No statistically

significant differences (P < 0.01) were found for the variable of point B in the

horizontal direction between groups indicating no differences between the

0.46

0.83

0.32

1.11

0.27

-1.86

-8.67! 7.8

4.nt 2.84

+0.59+ 0.32

T2 -T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYú-VALUESHIFT(mm)TIMEPERIOD

1.0

1.0

0.&

0

0

-0.64

-5.99+ 0.07

-1.1+ 0.01

+0.67!l.M

T2 -T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYú.VALUESHIFT (mm)TIMEPERIOD

Page 140: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

740

mean relapse of each group, therefore the four groups were combined and

analysed as one group.

Table 8.5 Comparison of relapse at point B(x) between groups

Table 8.6 Comparison of relapse at point B(y) between groups

8.3 ANALYSIS OF VARIABLES

8.3.1 Mandibularmovement

8.3.1.1 Horizontal setback and relapse

A mean setback of -4.98 mm * 0.93 mm (T2-T3) was measured at point B for the

24 patients who underwent mandibular setback. In the interim period (T3-T6), a

further setback of the mandible was noted and measured at -0.56 mm * 0.41. mm.

0.37

0.43

0.63

0.10

0.95

0.34

-0.93

0.82

0.56

-2.03

0.08

7.28

I-III. IIII. IVII-mtr-IVm-Iv

PROBABILITYT-VALUEGROUP

0.27

0.99

0.65

0.27

0.65

0.89

-1.31

0.01

-0.59

-1,.67

-0.6

-0.77

I-III .IIII.IVII. UI

II-rvItr. IV

PROBABILITYf .VALUEGROUP

Page 141: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

74't

In the long term, the total postoperative shift was measured as a further setback

of -0.18 mm * 0.35 mm at T7. Hence a slight, but statistically non significant,

relapse occurred from the interim period to long term (Table 8.7).

Table 8.7 Comparison of relapse at point B(x) - pooled data

* statistically significant (p < 0.01)

8.3.1.2 Vertical movement and relapse

An upward movement of -1.08 mm + 0.68 mm was measured at Point B. Afurther upward movement of Point B was evident by time T6 and measured -

0.39 mm t 0.47 mm. The total vertical shift recorded from immediately

following surgery to time T7 was -0.1l. mm + 0.25 mm, which meant that

evidence of relapse had occurred between the interim period and long term

follow-up, but this shift was not statisticatly significant (Table 8.8).

Table 8.8 Comparison of relapse at point B(y)-pooled data

<0.001*

0.20

0.61

5.37

1.35

0.52

-4.98+ 0.93

{.5610.41

-0.18+ 0.35

T2-T3

T3-T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYú.VALUESHIFT (mm)TIMEPERIOD

0.72

0.42

0.65

1.59

0.82

0.46

-1.08r 0.68

439! 0.47

-0.11+ 0.25

T2-T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYú.VALUESHIFT (mm)TIMEPERIOD

Page 142: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

742

8.3.1.3 Ansle SNB

Following mandibular setback, the angle SNB decreased by a mean of -2.72o *

0.45o (T2-T3). From time period T3 to T7 a further decrease of -0.1,7 * 0.19o was

measured but this shift was not statistically significant (Tabte 8.9).

Table 8.9 Comparison of relapse for angle SNB - pooled data

* statistically significant (p < 0.01)

8.3.2 Proximal and distal sesment alteration

8.3.2.1. Condylar displacement (S-HA)

(a) Vertical movement

Following vertical subsigmoid osteotomy, the proximal segment was observed

to sag and this was measured at +1.33 mm * 0.32 mm (T2-T3). The proximal

segment returned to within its preoperative position at time T7. This relapse

was statistically significant with moderate change from the interim period T6 to

T7 (Table 8.10).

<0.001+

0.03

0.37

6.M

2.42

0.91

-2.720+ 0.450

{.55'+ 0.230

4.17"+ 0.19"

T2 -T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYf .VALUESHIFT (des.)TIMEPERIOD

Page 143: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

1,43

Table 8.10 Comparison of relapse for distance S - HA(y)-pooled data

< 0.01*

0.03

< 0.01*

-4.77

2.49

3.6

+1.33+ 0.32

-1.291 0.51

-1.14+ 0.32

T2 -T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYú-VALUESHIFT (mm)TIMEPERIOD

+ statistically significant (p < 0.01)

(b) Horizontal movement

In addition, to the vertical displacement of the proximal segment in an inferior

direction, the condylar segment also moved minimally posteriorly, and this was

measured at -0.33 mm * 0.35 mm. It retu¡ned to its preoperative position by T6

(Table 8.11).

Table 8.L1 Comparison of relapse for distance S - HA(x) - pooled data

* statistically significant (p < 0.01)

8.3.2.2 Posterior facial height (PFH)

A mean decrease of -1.06 mm * 1.06 mm was measured as the change in

posterior facial height for the total group of 24 patients undergoing mandibular

setback using the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy procedure. Over the long term,

the posterior facial height increased +7.62 mm * 0.99 mm but this relapse was

not statistically significant (Table 8.12).

0.35

< 0.01*

0.04

0.96

0.96

-2.22

{.3310.35

+0.49t 0.24

+0.4510.20

T2 -T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYú,VALUESHIFT (mm)TIMEPERIOD

Page 144: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

7M

Table 8.L2 Comparison of relapse for distance PFH-pooled data

8.3.2.3 Anterior facial heieht (AFH)

Anterior facial height decreased a mean of -1,.46 mm * 0.62 mm for the 24

patients at surgery. This parameter shortened a further -0.48 mm * 0.45 mm at

time T6 but relapsed slightly at T7. This resulted in a total decrease in anterior

facial height of -'1..74 mm t 0.55 mm and this overall shift was statistically

significant (Table 8.13).

Table 8.L3 Comparison of relapse for distance AFH - pooled data

* statistically significant (p < 0.01)

8.3.2.4 Mandibular nlane anele (SN-Go-Me)

The mandibular plane angle immediately post surgery increased minimally,

measuring +0.52" + 0.86o. In the follow-up period, the mandibular plane angle

decreased from time period T3 to T7, an amount of -0.16o + 0.52o favouring a

return to its preoperative position although not completely and this shift was

not statistically significant (Table 8.14).

0.33

0.77

0.11

1.0

-1.43

-1,.65

-1.061 1.06

+1.44 + 1.01

+1,.6È.0.99

T2 -T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYú-VALUESHIFT (mm)TIMEPERIOD

0.03

0.30

< 0.01*

2.36

7.07

0.99

-7.46t 0.62

{.48+ 0.45

4.28! 0.26

T2-T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYú-VALUESHIFT (m¡n)TIMEPERIOD

Page 145: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

745

Table 8.L4 Comparison of relapse for mandibular plane angle (SN-Go-Me) -

pooled data

0.55

0.92

0.76

-0.61

0.10

0.31

]{).52'+ 0.860

-0.060+0.550

{.160+ 0.520

T2 -T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYú.VALUESHIFT (deg.)TIMEPERIOD

8.3.3 Sesmental inter - relationships

8.3.3.1 Gonial ansle (Ar-Go-Me)

A mean decrease in gonial angle of -2.1,0" + 0.66" was noted immediately

following surgery (T2-T3). In the follow-up period to time T7,t}:.e gonial angle

relapsed +3.13 o + 0.42o and this shift was statistically significant. This relapse

was evident by time T6 with minimal change to T7 (Table 8.15).

Table 8.15 Comparison of relapse for gonial angle (Ar-Go-Me) - pooled data

< 0.01*

< 0.001*

< 0.01*

3.2

-5.2

-7.49

-2.100+ 0.60

+3.08'+ 0.59"

+3.13o+ 0.42"

T2-T3

T3 -T6

T3-W

PROBABILITYT.VALUESHIFT (deg.)TIMEPERIOD

* statistically significant (p < 0.01)

8.3.3.2 Ramal anele (SN-Ar-Go)

The ramal angle increased +3.55o t 0.83o (T2-T3). This was followed by complete

relapse of -3.2o t 0.32o over the period T3 to T7 and this shift was statistically

significant and also evident by time T6 (Table 8.16).

Page 146: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

't46

Table 8.L6 Comparison of relapse for ramal angle ( SN-Ar-Go) - pooled data

< 0.001*

< 0.001'+

< 0.01',+

-4.26

4.28

8.22

+3.55"+ 0.83"

-3.01'+0.700

-3.20+ 0.32"

T2 -T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYú-VALUESHIFT (dee.)TIMEPERIOD

*statistically significant (p < 0.01)

8.3.4 Dentoskeletal chanees

8.3.4.1 Maxillarv incisal anele (Mx 1 SN)

-

Following maxillary incisal decompensations prior to surgery, the maxillary

incisal angle decreased by -3.88" + 7.72". Following surgery, the maxillary incisal

angle increased to an amount of +2.58o + 0.82o in the follow-up period at time

T7 and this was statistically significant (Table 8.17).

Table 8.L7 Comparison of relapse for angle Mx L SN - pooled data

* statistically significant (p < 0.01)

8.3.4.2 Interincisal anele

As a result of the maxillary incisal changes, the interincisal angle increased by

+2.85o t 2.35o. This was followed by u statistically significant decrease in

0.003*

0.02

0.005*

3.U

2.75

-3.15

-3.88"+ 1.12"

+2.23'+ 0.81"

+2.58"+ 0.82o

T2 -T3

T3 -T6

Ti-w

PROBABILITYf .VALUESHIFT (des.)TIMEPERIOD

Page 147: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

747

interincisal angle of -4.02" + 7.17o from T3 to T6 with a further increase in

interincisal angle over the long term follow-up (Table 8.18).

Table 8.18 Comparison of relapse for interincisal angle - pooled data

*statisticalty significant (p < 0.01)

8.3.4.3 Lower incisal ansle (IMPA)

Dental decompensations in Class III malocclusions usually result in an increase

in lower incisal angle. This was not evident in this study which demonstrated a

mean decrease or retroclination of -1.6o + 0.77". However, this dental

movement was not stable resulting in a proclination of lower incisors of +1..78"

+ 0.87" which was seen at time T6 but this was not statistically significant.

Stability over the long term was relatively maintained following this relapse

(Table 8.19).

Table 8.L9 Comparison of relapse for ansle IMPA - pooled data

0.24

< 0.01*

0.42

-1,.22

3.44

0.82

+2.85o + 2.35o

4.02" + 7.77"

-2.06" + 2.520

T2 -T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYú-VALUESHIFT (dee.)TIMEPERIOD

0.05

0.06

0.1

2.07

-2.04

-7.74

-1..6" + 0.77"

+7.78" + 0.87o

+1.18" + 0.68o

T2-T3

T3-T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYú-VALUESHIFT (deg.)TIMEPERIOD

Page 148: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

748

8.3.4.4 Overiet

-The overjet in Class III malocclusions manifest as a negative relationship. The

mean overjet prior to surgery was measured at -4.0 mm + 0.96 mm. Following

surgery, the overjet in this group of patients was improved to a positive value

of +2.79 + 0.2L mm. At the one year review, the overjet remained stable

averaging +2.82 + 0.27 mm. The long term stability was maintained with

minimal change, measuring +2.78 mm f 0.26 mm. This change was statistically

not significant (Table 8.20).

Table 8.20 Comparison of relapse for overjet - pooled data

*statistically significant (p < 0.01)

8.3.4.5 Overbite

In this group of patients, a tendency to open bite was noted with the overbite

prior to surgery, measuring -0.34 mm t 0.58 mm. The average increase in

overbite recorded for these patients was +2.94 mm * 0.64 mm following surgery.

A minor relapse occurred in the follow-up period resulting in a decrease of -0.32

mm * 0.24 mm at time T7 but this shift was not statistically significant (Table

8.27).

< 0.01*

0.48

0.92

-7.15

-0.73

-0.11

+6.78 !0.95

+{.21 + 0.28

+{.03 t 0.30

T2 -T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYf .VALUESHIFT (mm)TIMEPERIOD

Page 149: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

749

Table 8.21 Comparison of relapse for overbite - pooled data

*statistically significant (p < 0.01)

8.3.5 Sex of patients

The results of the relapse rates of the 24 patients in this study sample were

grouped by sex to determine if there were any differences in relapse between the

sexes. The study sample divided evenly into two groups resulting in 12 patients

in each group. No statistical significance as analysed by Student's f-test, could be

determined between the relapse of the two groups (Table 8.22 and Table 8.23).

Table 8.22 Comparison of differences in telapse at point B(x) for sexes

*statisticalty significant (p < 0.01)

Table 8.23 Comparison of differences in relapse at point B(y) for sexes

< 0.001*

0.72

0.20

-4.62

7.&

1.31

+2.94!0.64

4.46 +0.28

4.32!0.24

T2-T3

T3-T6

T3 -W

PROBABILTTYú.VALUESHIFT (mm)TIMEPERIOD

< 0.001*

0.20

6.04

1.35

T2-T3

T3-W

PROBABILITYT-VALUETIMEPERIOD

0.15

0.42

1.5

0.82

T2-T3

T3-W

PROBABILITYú.VALUETIMEPERIOD

Page 150: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

150

8.3.6 Period of maxillomandibular fixation

The period of fixation for each patient was calculated from the day of operation

to the day of removal of maxillomandibular fixation inclusive. The minimum

and maximum periods of fixation was then determined for each sex and a mean

as well as the standard deviation and range was subsequently calculated (Table

8.24).

Table 8.24 Period of maxillomandibular fixation

26

79

29

65

55

65

40

36

36

7.7

5.9

6.7

47.3

47.9

47.6

72

12

24

IVÍALE

FEMALE

TOTAL

RANGEMAXIMI.]MMINIMUMSTANDARD

DEVIATION

MEAN

DAYS

NUMBERSEX

To assess whether there was a relationship between the period of

maxillomandibular fixation and relapse pattern, the study sample was divided

into two groups. Postsurgical relapse (T3-T7) was compared befween cases with

a period of maxillomandibular fixation greater than the mean of 47 days and

those with a period of maxillomandibular fixation less than the mean of 47 days.

Using the Student's ú-test, no statistical significance was ascertained between the

two groups (Table 8.25).

Table 8.25 Comparison of relapse with different periods of

maxillomandibular f ixation

0.90

0.22

-0.13

7.27

0.171 0.60

4.26+ 039

0.05 + 0.67

0.36+ 0.29

T3-T7B(x)

T3-TzB(v)

PROBABILITYú-VALUERELAPSE

> 47 DAYS

RELAPSE

< 47 DAYS

TIMEPERIOD

Page 151: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

151

8.3.7 Age of patient at time of su¡gery

Growth of the mandible is an important factor in relapse of mandibular setback

procedures. Chronological age is used as an indicator to determine potential

growth, therefore, further comparisons were performed to assess age as a factor

in relapse of mandibular setback. The study sample was again divided into two

groups and comparisons were made between cases who were older than the

mean chronological age of 23 years and those who were younger than the mean

age of 23 years. A further sub-division of those younger than 23 years of age into

males and females was necessary due to sex differences influencing relapse.

Analysis by the Student's f-test, showed no statistical significance being evident

between the two groups as well as within the subgroup (Table 8.26).

Table 8.26 Comparison of relapse at point B(x) for age and sex

8.3.8 Orthodontics zersøs no orthodontics

Twenty patients of the 24 patients in the study group had presurgical

orthodontics to align and decompensate the dentition prior to surgery. The

remaining four patients had surgery utilising arch bars ligated to the dentition

to enable maxillomandibular fixation. Comparisons were made between these

two groups to determine if there were any differences in relapse. Analysis by the

Studen.t's ú-test, showed no statistical significance being evident between the two

groups (Table 8.27).

0.72

0.13

0.57

-1.65

-7.63

0.59

FEMALES > 23 VS

MALES > 23 VS

MALES <23 VS

<23

<23

<23 FEMALES

PROBABILITYú.VALUEAGE and SEX

Page 152: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

752

Table8.27 Comparison of relapse between orthodontics versus

no orthodontics

8.3.9 Influence of maxillarv sureerv

-

Horizontal and vertical movements of the maxilla following surgery may

influence the relapse potential of mandibular movements. When maxillary

surgery is undertaken in conjunction with mandibular surgery, its influence on

skeletal changes is evident in that the amount of setback required is markedly

reduced as the maxilla is surgically advanced. Therefore, the influence of

mafllary changes was assessed to determine if it had any effect on the relapse

potential of mandibular setback procedures.

8.3.9.L Horizontal movement and relapse

A mean advancement of +2.39 mm * 0.78 mm (T2-T3) was measured at Point A

for the 22 patients who underwent maxillary surgery. In the long term, relapse

was measured to be -7.07 mm * 0.29 mm at T7 and this was statistically

significant. However this relapse was also evident by time T6 with minimal

change over the period T6 to T7 (Table 8.28).

0.78

0.88

-0.31

-0.15

0.49 + 1.36

0.07 + 0.27

0.05 + 0.45

0.01 + 0.30

T3-TZB(x)

T3-TZB(v)

PROBABILITYú-VALUEMEANRELAPSE

NO ORTHO.

MEAN RELAPSE

ORTHO.

TIMEPERIOD

Page 153: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

153

Table 828 Comparison of relapse for point A(x) - pooled data

* statistically significant (p < 0.01)

8.3.9.2 Vertical movement and relapse

A downward movement of +7.52 mm * 0.61 mm was measured at point A. Arelapse movement at point A was evident by time T6 and the total relapse

measured at T7 was -1.4 mm * 0.36 mm and this was statistically significant

(Table 8.29).

Table 829 Comparison of relapse for point A(y) - pooled data

*statistically significant (p < 0.01)

8.3.9.3 Angle SNA

Following maxillary advancement surgery, the angle SNA increased by a mean

of +2.19 + 0.77" (T2-T3). From time period T3 to T7 a decrease of -7.1,6 + 0.36o was

measured (Table 8.30).

< 0.01*

0.08

0.001*

-3.06

1.86

3.75

+2.39 !0.78

{.96 + 0.51

-1,.07 + 0.29

T2-T3

T3 -T6

T3-T7

PROBABILITYú-VALUESHIFT (mm)TIMEPERIOD

0.02

0.02

< 0.001*

-2.49

2.67

4.18

+1.52 + 0.61

-1.5 r 0.59

-1.4+ 0.36

T2-T3

T3-T6

T3-T7

PROBABILITYú-VALUESHIFT (mm)TIMEPERIOD

Page 154: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

1,54

Table 8.30 Comparison of relapse for angle SNA - pooled data

*statistically significant (p < 0.01)

8.3.L0 Influence of hvoid position

8.3.10.L Horizontal movement and relapse

The data showed that the hyoid bone shifted +1.35 mm * 1..47 mm horizontally

forwards following setback surgery but returned towards its preoperative

position over the follow-up period (Table 8.31). This relapse occurred within

the first six weeks following surgery with minor shifts until biological

equilibrium was established. The movement and relapse of the hyoid bone in

the horizontal direction was not statistically significant (Table 8.32).

Table 8.31 Horizontal movement of hyoid bone and subsequent relapse

+1.35

- 7.61

- 7.24

- 1.03

mm+ 1.47

mmt 1.61

mm+ 1.47

mm+ 1.14

T2-T3

T3-T4

T3-T6

T3-W

MOVEMENT(mn)TIMEPERIOD

< 0.01*

0.02

< 0.01*

-3.07

2.æ

3.23

+2.19o + 0.77o

-1.35'+ 0.51"

-1.16'+ 0.36"

T2-T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYú-VALUESHIFT (deg.)TIMEPERIOD

Page 155: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

155

Table 8.32 Comparison of relapse for point H(x) - pooled data

8.3.L0.2 Vertical movement and relanse

In the vertical direction, the hyoid bone displaced inferiorly +4.1,9 mm + 1.09

mm but over the follow-up period, its repositioning upwards exceeded its initial

inferior movement. The measured superior repositioning amounted to -6.2

mm * 1.05 mm. This relapse was statistically significant at t}:re 1.Vo level (Table

8.33).

Table 8.33 Comparison of relapse for point H(y) - pooled data

0.001*

< 0.001*

< 0.001*

-3.86

5.04

5.91

+4.19!1.09

-5.531 1.09

-6.t 1.05

T2 -T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYf-VALUESHIFT (mm)TIMEPERIOD

*statistically significant (p < 0.01)

8.3.LL Pharyngeal depth (AP-PP)

A preliminary assessment of the pharyngeal depth was performed to assess if

there were any changes as a consequence of the mandibular setback.

0.37

0.41,

0.38

-0.92

0.84

0.90

T2-T3

T3-T6

T3-W

PROBABILITYt. VALUETIMEPERIOD

Page 156: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

1,56

8.3.L1.1 Horizontal movement and relapse

Pharyngeal depth in the horizontal direction immediately following surgery

resulted in'an increase in depth of +1.11 mm t 1.06 mm and had relapsed -0.47

mm t 0.99 mm by T7 (Table 8.34).

Table 8.34 Comparison of relapse for pharyngeal depth tAP - PP(x)l

- pooled data

8.3.L1.2 Vertical movement and relapse

Following surgery, the pharyngeal depth in the vertical direction decreased in

dimensions -0.24 mm * 0.31 mm with a fu¡ther decrease of -0.47 mm * 0.33 mm

by time T7 (Table 8.35).

Table 8.35 Comparison of relapse for pharyngeal depth IAp - PP(y)l

- pooled data

0.31

0.74

0.&

-1.05

0.34

0.47

+1.111 1.06

{.3010.89

-0.47! 0.99

T2 -T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYú.VALUESHIFT (mm)TIMEPERIOD

0.43

0.32

0.1,6

0.80

1.03

1.45

4.24! 0.31.

{.31r 0.30

4.471 0.33

T2 -T3

T3 -T6

T3 -W

PROBABILITYú.VALUESHIFT (mm)TIMEPERIOD

Page 157: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

'1.57

8.4 COMPLICATIONS FOLLOWING VERTICAL SUBSIGMOID

OSTEOTOMY

8.4.1 Intraoperative complications

8.4.1.L Haemorrhage

Experience of a brisk haemorrhage was noted during one operation whilst the

author was performing the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy in the region of the

sigmoid notch. The osteotomy cut was completed to enable access to the

bleeding vessel and this was subsequently cauterised with no further

consequences. It was assumed that the madllary artery was lacerated. This

assumption was made for two reasons; the rapidity of bleeding and the patient

experienced no neurosensory deficit of the inferior alveolar nerve on

postoperative testing.

8.4.2 Immediate postoperative complications

8.4.2.7 Condylar dislocation

Although an uncommon occurrence, condylar dislocation has been reported by

Quinn and Wedell (1988). In an unreported case in the South AusÍalian Unit, a

trainee of the Unit inadvertently dislocated the proximal segment anteriorly on

one side. This required a second operation to relocate the fragment and this was

performed by a preauricular approach. There were no further problems

associated with the postoperative recovery following this operation.

Page 158: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

158

8.4.3 Delayed postoperative complications

8.4.3.L Postooerative infection

The South Australian Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Unit has had experience of

two cases of infection out of 53 patients who underwent 104 vertical subsigmoid

osteotomies. There were no apparent reasons for these infections, as in both

cases/ the patients presented with facial swelling at least three weeks after

surgery. It is also the policy of the Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Unit to

administer antibiotics prophylactically at the time of induction of general

anaesthesia.

8.4.3.2 Sequestration of proximal segment

An unreported case of sequestration of a portion of the proximal fragment in

the South Australian Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Unit was associated with

infection. The patient presented with facial swelling during the period of

maxillomandibular fixation. It was necessary to explore and drain the facial

swelling and this was performed under general anaesthesia. Exploration of the

swelling identified a fragment of bone which appeared non vital and

necessitated its removal.

Page 159: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

159

CHAPTER 9

RESULTS: ERRORS OF THE METHOD

9.1 ERRORS OF THE METHOD

The magnitude of errors in the horizontal and vertical axes for ten sets of

double determinations were calculated and summarised in Tables 9.7 and 9.2.

The maximum mean difference measured in both the vertical and horizontal

axes was 2.24 mm. The mean differences in the horizontal dimension had more

error when compared to the mean differences in the vertical dimension. The

errors for the mean differences varied widely ranging from 0.11 to 2.24 in the

horizontal axis and from 0.01 to 0.21 in the vertical axis. The standard errors of

the mean differences varied from 0.08 to 0.99 in the horizontal axis and from

0.05 to 0.19 in the vertical axis.

The most variable point in identification in the horizontal plane was the point

pogonion with a standard error of the mean being measured at 0.99 mm.

Discrepancies in the location of this point ranged from -0.75 to 0.34 mm in the

horizontal plane. In the vertical direction, the most variable point was gonion

with a standard error of the mean being measured at 0.19 mm. Discrepancies in

the location of this point ranged from -0.37 to 1..52 mm in the vertical plane.

The most reliable point in the horizontal plane was the apex of the upPer

incisor with a standard error of 0.08 mm. In the vertical plane, the most reliable

point was pogonion with a standard error of 0.05 mm.

Page 160: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

't60

The two tail Student's ú-test for paired values showed that the posterior nasal

spine in the vertical plane was significant at the 'l,Vo level. In the horizontal

plane, a number of points showed significance at t}:.e 'l,Vo level. These were

points condylion, hinge axis, articulare, gonion, anterior nasal spine, upper

molar crown.

Scattergrams for each of the hard tissue points are illustrated showing errors in

the horizontal and vertical axes.

Page 161: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

76't

Table 9.1 Error for hard tissue points (horizontal axis) by double

determination

0.12

0.11

0.14

0.11

0.09

0.12

0.23

0.74

0.10

0.11

0.1,4

0.08

0.15

0.08

0.08

0.13

0.11

0.'t2

0.1.6

0.72

0.11

0.14

0.11

0.09

0.12

0.23

0.14

0.99

0.11

0.74

0.08

0.15

0.08

0.08

0.13

0.11

0.72

0.16

0.34

0.&

0.78

0.61

0.54

0.47

2.72

0.&

0.34

0.41

0.47

0.57

0.36

0.36

0.16

0.65

0.56

0.92

0.81

-0.95

-0.52

-0.95

-0.51

-0.37

-0.65

-0.55

-7.02

-0.75

-0.74

-0.92

-0.27

-1.31

-0.39

-0.53

-0.73

-0.44

-0.45

-0.95

0.72

0.11

0.14

0.11

0.æ

0.10

0.23

0.14

0.10

0.11

0.74

0.08

0.14

0.08

0.08

0.13

0.11

0.12

0.16

-0.18

-1.60

-0.55

0.64

0.53

0.45

7.43

-0.55

0.08

-0.24

-0.46

2.24

-0.91

0.91

-7.27

-0.86

0.11

2.10

0.43

NxPox

Orx

C-ox

FIA x

Arx

C¡x

Mex

Pgt

Bx

Ax

ANS x

PNS x

ISx

ASx

IIxAIxMSx

MIx

EVo var.S (enor)Max.MturE (M difoM diffVariable

Page 162: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

762

Table 9.2 Enor for hard tissue points (vertical axis) by double determination

0.08

0.08

0.13

0.11

0.1,23

0.10

0.19

0.09

0.0s

0.08

0.16

0.11

0.11

0.72

0.16

0.11

0.07

0.10

0.08

0.08

0.08

0.13

0.11

0.72

0.10

0.19

0.09

0.05

0.08

0.16

0.10

0.11

0.72

0.76

0.11

0.07

0.10

0.08

0.31

0.35

0.60

0.48

0.90

0.52

1.52

0.47

0.26

0.44

0.90.72

0.61

0.50

r.06

0.63

0.30

0.48

0.ø

-0.53

-0.35

-0.59

-0.56

-0.49

-0.44

-0.37

-0.65

-0.23

-0.28

-1.08

-0.42

-0.39

-0.80

-0.57

-0.59

-0.26

-0.53

-0.10

0.08

0.08

0.13

0.11

0.12

0.10

0.11

0.08

0.05

0.08

0.15

0.10

0.10

0.72

0.16

0.10

0.06

0.09

0.07

-0.08

0.07

0.07

0.06

0.16

-0.08

0.18

-0.07

0.02

0.06

-0.72

0.02

0.19

0.03

0.21

-0.03

0.01

0.06

0.18

NyPoy

oryCoy

HAyA.yGoy

Mey

Pgy

ByAy

ANS y

PNS y

ISy

ASy

IIyAIyMSy

MIv

E%o var.S (eror)Max.MirLE (M difoM di-ffVariable

Page 163: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

1.63

Figure 9.1 Differences between digitised double determinations for

nasion (N)

3

z o

2

3

,{

3 2 oNx

2 3 1

Figure 9.2 Differences between digitised double detenninations for

porion (Po)

3

2

0où

I 0Poy

2 3 4

Page 164: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

't64

Figure 9.3 Differences befween digitised double determinations for

orbitale (Or)

1

3

2

o 0

0Or

2 3 ¡l

I

Figure 9.4 Differences between digitised double determinations for

condylion (Co)

3

2

oo()

2

3

i ^à^lt

l a/¡

oCox

2 3 1

Page 165: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

165

Figure 9.5 Differences between digitised double detenrrinations for

hinge axis (HA)

1

3

2

I o

I

3 2 oHAx

? 3 4

Figure 9.6 Differences between digitised double detenninations for

articulare (Ar)

1

3

2

1

o

2

2 oAr x

aA-'^ l:^ r

2 3 1

Page 166: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

766

Figure 9.7 Differences between digitised double deter:ninations for

gonion (Go)

1

3

2

oo o

oGox

Figure 9.8 Differences between digitised double detenninations for

menton (Me)

¡l 2 3 a

o

1

3

?.

1

o

3^

2 2oIr¡þ x

3 1

Page 167: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

767

Figure 9.9 Differences between digitised double detenninations for

pogonion (Pg)

oC

4

3

1

o

2 o 2 3Pgx

Figure 9.10 Differences between digitised double determinations for point B

o

,l

3

2

1

o

2

3 oBx

2 3

Page 168: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

168

Figure 9.11 Differences between digitised double detenninations for point A

1

3

2

t

o

3 2 2 3oAx

Figure 9.12 Diffetences between digitised double detenninations for ANS

aoz

1

3

2

I

o

I

2 oANS x

2 3

Page 169: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

1.69

Figure 9.L3 Differences between digitised double determinations for PNS

at,

À

,t

3

2

1

o

-13 2 o

PNS x

olSx

2 3 a

Figure 9.L4 Differences between digitised double determinations for upper

incisat tip (IS)

at)

1

3

2

1

o

-¡l3 2 2 3 1

Page 170: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

770

Figure 9.L5 Differences between digitised double detenninations for upper

incisal apex (AS)

I

3

2

ato

4 3 2 0ASx

2 3 Á

Figure 9.16 Differences between digitised double detenninations for lower

incisal tip (AI)

4

3

2

a 0

3 2

¡fâ

2 0Al r

3

Page 171: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

777

Figure 9.17 Differences between digitised double determinations for lower

incisal apex (II)

3

2

0

1 oll x

2 3

Figure 9.L8 Differences between digitised double detenninations for upper

molar crown (MS)

3

2

s)0

2

A^^

oMSx

2 3 1

Page 172: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

772

Figure 9.L9 Differences between digitised double determinations for lower

molar crown (MI)

3

2

=

-{2 o

MI2 3 4

Page 173: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

773

V

DISCUSSION

Page 174: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

174

CHAPTER 1,0

DISCUSSION

1.0.1 PATIENTSELECTION

Fifty three case records were retrieved from the surgical files of the Oral and

Maxillofacial Surgery Unit, The University of Adelaide. Of the 53 patients who

underwent surgical treatrnent, a total of 24 patients were accepted into the study.

The remainder of the patient records were excluded for reasons of:

(i)

(ii )

(iii)

incomplete radiographic records necessary for detailed analysis (n=26);

syndromic patients with physical disabilities (n=1);

unilateral vertical subsigmoid osteotomy and unilateral sagittal split

osteotomy for treatment of mandibular asFnmetry (n=1); and

craniofacial anomalies requiring extensive surgery (n=1).(iv)

The problem of incomplete records is not uncommon, even in the most

dictatorial of surgical units internationally. Sailer, (personal communication,

1,993) emphasises that there still exists room for improving the methods of

record-keeping to enable accurate and concise research. Sailer's Oral and

Maxillofacial Surgery Unit experienced a radiograph retrieval rate of only about

60%. For example, Johanson et aL. (1,979) had a retrieval rate of only 20 cases at

the end of five years with the initial sample comprising 87 patients.

Even though an established protocol for taking radiographs existed in the

department, numerous cases were found to have incomplete radiographic data.

This was due to records frequently being misplaced, not requested postsurgically

Page 175: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

775

by the surgeon or orthodontist, requested but not taken or the patient was lost to

follow-up.

The reason for lack of radiographic collection stemmed from the underlying

socioeconomic factors influencing patient commitment as many of the school

students and unemployed patients in this study moved interstate from Adelaide

to pursue further studies and work opportunities. Only one patient was

pregnant at the time of recall and did not wish to be exposed to radiation.

The selected sample ranged in age from 15.3 years to 59.4 years with a mean age

of 23 years. Bone age in this study could not be confirmed in this retrospective

study as hand - wrist films were not taken at the time of surgery. Although

some hand and wrist radiographs were taken at the initial presentation and

consultation with the orthodontist to assess the degree of deformity and the

timing of treatment, the decision to undertake surgery was based primarily on

the post pubertal changes as well as chronological age. Hand and wrist

radiographs would have provided a more reliable guide to developmental

status than clinical assessment but on a number of occasions the technique of

superimposition of serial radiographs was performed for those deemed to be

still active in growth.

A comparison with untreated patients matched for skeletal maturation, sex and

dentoskeletal pattern may have provided a clearer indication of the effects of

growth. Flowever, this issue could be addressed by closer co-operation between

the Orthodontic Department and the Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Unit and

also by the establishment of a more efficient filing system to store records. The

rate limiting step in this exercise is the referral of all dentoskeletal Class III

patients by the orthodontists to the Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Unit. These

Page 176: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

776

dentoskeletal Class III patients would be deemed, by the orthodontists, to be

treatable by orthodontics alone with no surgical assistance required at all.

The number of female patients matched the number of male patients in this

study sample only because of exclusion of patients with incomplete records

although most orthognathic studies show a higher proportion of females

undergoing surgery (Pepersack and Chausse, 1978; Franco et al. 1,989). Further

analysis of the statistics for orthognathic surgery from the Oral and Maxillofacial

Surgery Unit showed that the number of female patients undergoing

orthognathic surgery exceeded the number of male patients with an

approximate ratio of two to one. The initial records (n=53) enlisted for the

study, prior to culling, also showed a ratio of two to one with females

undergoing orthognathic surgery more often than males. A problem was

identified during the follow-up period in that there was a higher number of

females who failed to attend for postoperative radiographs and review. This

resulted in a number of records being excluded from the study.

Comparison studies with non surgically, orthodontic treated patients are usually

difficult in the management of Class III malocclusions, as the greater the degree

of deformity, the greater the need to utilise surgical procedures to achieve

functional and aesthetic balance. Camouflage orthodontic techniques are

acceptable only when the skeleton does not exhibit gross disproportions as well.

10.2 MATERIALS AND METHODS

The technique of the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy surgically renders the

mandible into three separate fragments which move independent of each other

until healing has completed. Gonion is usually the point at the angle of the

mandible constructed by bisection of the angle of the tangents to the lower

Page 177: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

177

border of the mandible and posterior border of the ascending ramus. As a result

of the mandibular surgery, point gonion becomes difficult to construct as the

proximal fragment contains this point and is "free floating" until the fragments

unite. In this study, point gonion was selected as being the intersection of the

tangents to the lower border of the mandible and posterior border of the

ascending ramus (Kelsey, 1968).

Page 178: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

178

CHAPTER 11

DISCUSSION: FACTORS IN RELAPSE OF VERTICAL SUBSIGMOID

OSTEOTOMY

The results of this study showed that there were no statistically significant

differences between sexes and between age for any of the variables studied.

There was also no evidence of differences in relapse between the four

subgroups, consequently the four subgroups were combined and the variables

analysed as a pooled group.

77..]. DEFINITION OF RELAPSE

In this study, point B was primarily used as the indicator of assessing relapse as

this landmark was the only point not surgically repositioned. Its identification

is cephalometrically easier than other mandibular landmarks. Even with the

one case of genioplasty performed as part of the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy,

the osteotomy for this procedure is placed well below the Point B used in the

analysis to determine relapse.

17.2 ORTHODONTICS AND OCCLUSION

Presurgical orthodontics to align and decompensate the dentition has been

mentioned as a factor in skeletal stability. Greater stability of mandibular setback

procedures is thought to be associated with a better postoperative occlusion. In

this study, a positive overbite and overjet were achieved long term in all but

one patient and this supports the thinking of Phillips et aI, (t986); Wisth, (1981)

and Becker, (7966). Minimal and statistically non significant relapse of overbite

Page 179: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

779

and overjet were recorded in the postoperative period. A comparison between

orthodontic treated (n=20) and non orthodontic (n=4) treated mandibular

setbacks was performed and no statistically significant differences in relapse was

found between the two groups. This is contrary to the findings of Poulton,

Taylor and Ware (7963) who advocated surgery be performed prior to

orthodontics as this was believed to be more stable. This study also confirms

that of Johanson et al. (1,979) who compared surgery with orthodontics and

without orthodontics and found the relapse to be of the same magnitude.

Stability of dental decompensations was found to be variable in this study with

the mean proclination of the lower incisors relapsing. Vasir et al. (1997)

highlighted that dental decompensations in their study of surgically corrected

Class III malocclusions were stable whereas Artun et al. (7990) acknowledged

that relapse of decompensated dentition was inevitable in the long term.

Difficulties are also encountered when measuring relapse of dental

decompensations in conjunction with surgical movement of the maxilla and/ or

mandible. The difficulty is in determining whether the relapse is due solely to

dental movements or due to reangulation of the maxilla and/or mandible. The

surgical movements would consequently alter the angles used to measure

incisor position in the same direction as if dental relapse had occurred.

Simpson (1,974) eluded to the role of the tongue in causing relapse of the lower

incisors following surgery and postulated that this postsurgical proclination of

the lower teeth was due to active tongue pressure but this correlation was not

observed in this study. Hyoid position was analysed to reflect tongue position

and the changes in this study would suggest that no active tongue pressure was

present after surgery as the tongue occupied a higher position relative to its

preoperative position This instability of dental decompensations would also

explain the further shift of Point B in the same direction as the setback. As

relapse of a decompensated maxillary arch occurs the buccal segments would

Page 180: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

180

rotate palatally and inferiorly causing displacement of the mandible in a

clockwise direction. This would rotate Point B posteroinferiorly simulating a

further shift of the mandible in the direction of the setback. Hirose et al. (7976)

trialed the use of elastics as well as the wearing of chin caps for as long as six

months after surgery in an attempt to prevent relapse and found this to be of

great benefit in their study population. This concept was also adopted in this

study whereby every patient used guiding elastics in the postoperative phase.

This may account for a reduction in relapse potential as the elastics were placed

such that there was a vector force directed in the same direction as the surgical

setback.

1.1.3 MAGNITUDE OF MANDIBULAR SETBACK

The amount of correction at the time of surgery has been cited as one of the

possible causes of relapse (Abe et al. 1980; Reitzik, 7980; Astrand et al. 1,973). It

was also shown that a significant relapsing potential may exist when the

amount of correction exceeded 10 mm (Kobayashi et aI. 7986). In this study,

there was minimal relapse evident following the vertical subsigmoid osteotomy

and this finding supports those of Pepersack and Chausse (1,978) and Sorokolit

and Nanda (1990) who found no correlation between magnitude of mandibular

setback and relapse. No anterior open bite deformities resulted following

surgery in this study whereas this problem was encountered by Astrand (1973b)

and Reitzik (1980). Moss (1990) in identifying the tongue as a cause of relapse,

reasoned that the degree of relapse would be related to the amount of

mandibular setback but this would only occur if tongue space had been reduced

with counter pressure imposed on the mandible and dentition. The tongue

position altered in this study but favourably enough not to cause mandibular

relapse.

Page 181: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

181

17.4 CONDYLAR POSITION

Orthognathic surgical procedures have been associated with minor

displacements of the condyle in relation to the mandibular fossa. In this study,

there was evidence of condylar sag of the proximal segment immediately

following surgery and the direction of this movement was inconsistent with

other reports (Sund et al. 1983; Wisth and Tornes,1975). The condylar fragment

showed a posteroinferior displacement in this study but returned to itspreoperative position. This condylar movement represents a hybrid of those

reported in the literature where the most commonly reported displacement

occurred in an anteroinferior direction although studies have reported

displacements in all directions. Normalisation of the condyle to the

preoperative position is found during the period of maxillomandibular fixation

and later at progress examination. Initially, this normalisation of the condyle is

associated with reverse displacement of the condyle and thereafter is dependent

on a combination of displacement and skeletal remodelling (Ritzau et al. 1,989).

Elaborating on this event, it is interesting to note that the return of the condyle

during the period of maxillomandibular fixation is not total and that a

significant anterior and inferior displacement of the condyle is evident at three

years postoperatively (Petersson and Willmar-Hogeman, 1989). Therefore/ a

correlation should be evident between mandibular relapse in the posterior

direction and this residual non return of the condyle to its preoperative

position. But this is not the case. A number of interesting reasons account for

this. Firstly, condylar remodelling (new bone formation) in the posterosuperior

direction was identified in the study of Petersson and Willmar-Hogeman, (7989)

and this correlated to the degree of postoperative inferior displacement of the

condyle. The average width of new bone formation in the posterosuperior

portion of the condylar head amounted to 7-2 mm which is largely equivalent to

the amount of residual displacement of the condyle in an inferoanterior

Page 182: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

782

direction which does not return to the preoperative condyle position. Eckerdal

et al. (1986) also showed similar results with skeletal remodelling of the TMJ

taking place in 80Vo of cases after oblique sliding osteotomies. The mean

amount of bone apposition in the condyle was 1.4 mm. Hollender and Ridell

(7974) found changes in joint relations in 727o and Kundert and Hadjianghelou

(1980) in 88%. Legrell and Nystrom (1990), comparing condylar changes in

intraoral and extraoral oblique sliding osteotomies, found, most commonly,

signs of sclerosis and bone remodelling in 85Vo and 73Vo of cases respectively but

these differences were not statistically significant. Eckerdal et al. (1986) also

showed that there were no differences in skeletal remodelling whether wiring

or non wiring of the fragments had been used. Interesting to note also in an

experiment by Boyne ("1,966), was the distinct new bone formation at the

attachment of the lateral pterygoid muscle at the neck of the condylar head.

This form of remodelling was only seen as part of the later healing process and

suggests the existence of altered condylar relationships due to the operation.

Edlund et al. (1979) also reports adverse remodelling changes in the condylar

head following operation in the form of erosions located in the superior part of

the condyle which healed within three years and osteophytes which were

located in the anterior part of the condyle and remained. The clinicopathologic

significance of these were undetermined. No analysis was performed on our

group of patients to identify condylar remodelling as tomograms, which are best

suited for this exercise, were not taken for any of the patients in this group. As

this was a retrospective study it was not possible to include this type of analysis

but prospective studies can be formulated with this change in condylar

morphology. It would have been interesting to determine whether bone

apposition had occurred and where it would have occurred in this study as the

displacement of the condyles was in the opposite direction to that of other

studies, ie. in the posteroinferior direction.

Page 183: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

183

1-1.5 ROTATIONAL EFFECTS BETWEEN FRAGMENTS

In this study there were rotational effects between the proximal and distal

fragments. The gonial angle was measured as having decreased from the

preoperative to the postoperative period and this was due to a clockwise

rotation of the proximal segment as the distal segment was positioned

posteriorly. The proximal segment returned to its preoperative position over

the follow-up period and had occurred within a year following surgery. Franco

et al. (1989) and Komori et al. (7987) held the opinion that detachment of the

medial pterygoid muscle was necessary to minimise relapse and reasoned that

clockwise rotation of the proximal segment placed the medial muscle

attachments under tension with consequent relapse when muscle function

returned to equilibrium. This investigation provided no evidence to support

this idea as the proximal segments did rotate in a clockwise direction and also

returned to its original position with no significant relapse. Astrand and

Ericson (1974) postulated that a greater angulation with a large space between the

proximal fragment and the lateral surface of the ramus should be associated

with a longer healing period and, consequently, undesirable positional changes

of the mandible. However, the conclusion drawn from this study showed that

there was no significant correlation between the angulation of the condylar

fragment and the positional changes of the mandible at six months. AIso this

study showed that small overlapping areas between the fragments was almost

significantly correlated with a superior shift of gonion implying that greater

bone contact reduces postoperative relapse of the mandible. The lateral

angulation of the proximal segment was not investigated in this study. There

would be a need to cephalometrically standardise the radiographic technique

before this could area could be reviewed although there were no cases where the

proximal segment was adversely positioned when reviewing the

posteroanterior mandibular radiographs. The current protocol which exists in

Page 184: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

7U

the Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Department is to take posteroanterior

mandibular radiographs without cephalometric head orientation to identify that

the proximal segments are laterally positioned.

There were no cases of medial displacement of the proximal segment in this

study and this was confirmed by radiographs in the immediate postoperative

phase. Rosenquist (1990) has shown that medial displacement of the proximal

segment is of no consequence and even defends the concept that medial

displacement of the proximal segment could in fact lead to greater stability. He

explains that less angulation of the proximal segment results in less relapse

because the contact area with the distal segment increases and consequently

healing is improved.

However, there was one case in this series in which the condylar head was

dislocated from the mandibular fossa. Relocation of the condylar head was

required and a preauricular open surgical approach was undertaken to achieve

this. The remainder of the convalescent period for this patient was unevenúul.

77.6 WIRE OSTEOSYNTHESIS BETWEEN THE PROXIMAL AND DISTAL

SEGMENTS

Wire osteosynthesis of the proximal and distal segments following osteotomy

can only be achieved when the operation is performed via an extraoral

technique. In this study, every osteotomy was performed via an intraoral

approach, therefore the effects of interfragment wiring could not be assessed.

Some studies have shown no differences in relapse whether or not the

fragments are wired together (Nordin et al. 1,986; Athanasiou et al. 1991) and

others have shown results to the contrary (Isaacson et al. 1978).

Page 185: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

185

17.7 MAXILLOMANDIBULARFIXATION

Controversy exists as to the time period in which a patient should be in

maxillomandibular fixation. Variable time periods have been reported ranging

from two to ten weeks. In this study the time period ranged from 5.6 to 9.3

weeks. The mean time period of fixation was 6.8 weeks. When comparing the

relapse between those below and above the mean fixation period, no statistical

significance in relapse was noted. The literature adequately supports the

variation in time periods of maxillomandibular fixation in which minimal or

no relapse has been measured. However, no agreement has been reached as to

the optimal period of maxillomandibular fixation. Studies have been

performed to determine the minimum time required for complete bone healing

to occur and results have estimated that up to 20 weeks in monkeys is necessary

and a further six weeks is necessary in humans (Reitzik, 1982). Others have

estimated up to one and a half to two years before total maturation of the bony

union (Johanson et al. 7979; Rosenquist et al. 1987).

It is thought that relapse may occur as long as the functional matrix can

influence an unstable osteotomy site. Flence, another issue raised in the review

of literature was that of decortication of the fragments to enable cortex to cortex

healing which some believe improves the strength of the bony union

(Reitzik,1983). No support for this concept was found in this study as no

decortication was performed on any of the osteotomies and no subsequent

relapse was evident.

Page 186: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

186

The stretching of wires during the maxillomandibular fixation period would

allow minor movement of the fragments before completion of bone healing but

this did not result in any problem. Suffice to say that the wires were tightened at

each review appointment. Skeletal fixation has been trialed (Astrand and

Ridell, 1,973; Rosenquist et al. 7982; Jonsson et al. 7983; Rosenquist et al. 7985;

Stella, 7986; Epker and Wessberg, 7982; Nystrom et al. 1984) as it was thought to

reduce relapse by preventing extrusion of incisors and increase in anterior facial

height, but in this study no skeletal fixation was used and therefore did not

support the philosophy of skeletal fixation in the prevention of relapse. In fact,

a decrease in anterior facial height was measured in this series in the immediate

postoperative phase but returned to its preoperative position in the long term

follow-up.

Management problems have been reported with the use of maxillomandibular

fixation and in this series of. 24 patients no increased morbidity was

encountered. All patients were instructed in the removal of maxillomandibular

fixation in the event of respiratory embarrassment and all patients were

counselled by a dietitian prior to discharge from hospital. A number of patients

experienced loss in weight during the period of maxillomandibular fixation.

More importantly, this weight loss was appreciated by most of the patients who

were endeavouring to improve their self esteem by having corrective jaw

surgery with no consideration being given to an obesity problem.

Unfortunately, this weight loss was not long lasting and was subsequently

regained very rapidly following removal of the maxillomandibular fixation as it

enabled them to return to their normal presurgery eating habits.

Page 187: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

787

1.1.8 MUSCULARINTERACTIONS

Tongue pressure has been singled out as an important cause of relapse and

consequently tongue reduction surgery was performed to reduce the size of the

tongue. The only method of assessing tongue size and posture in this study was

to measure the position of the hyoid bone as it reflected tongue movements and

could be radiographically determined. Therefore, an analysis of the data was

undertaken to determine if a relationship between tongue position and relapse

of the mandible following setback surgery was evident. The most

superoanterior point of the body of the hyoid bone was identified as the

landmark to assess its position relative to the line S-SN7. Greco et al. (1990)

found that mandibular setback resulted in reduction of the hypopharyngeal air

space due to tongue repositioning. In this study, it was found that the hyoid

bone shifted anteriorly and inferiorly in the immediate postoperative period.

Within six weeks following operation, the horizontal shift of the hyoid had

relapsed to its original position but more importantly, the hyoid bone occupied a

more superior position relative to its preoperative position. This would

indicate that the tongue had re-adapted to a new position to maintain the

hypopharyngeal airway space by shifting vertically to occupy more of the space

of the mouth. It may also suggest that tongue function has altered to

acconunodate for the mandibular setback (Proffit and White,7970). Also noted

to compensate for narro*irg of the airway was the change in the pharyngeal

depth. The depth of the pharynx had increased in dimensions over the time

period studied. Moss (1990) reported that where relapse of the mandible

occurred following mandibular surgery, the tongue shifted upwards only. In

those that did not relapse the tongue position shifted upwards and backwards.

This study did not support Moss's findings, in that relapse should have occurred

as only an upward shift of the tongue was found.

Page 188: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

188

Tongue reduction has been practised in the past in an effort to minimise relapse

(Becker, 1966; Kole, 7963; Onland and Merkx, "1.972). It was shown in this study

that the tongue was not a contributing factor in relapse of mandibular setback

surgery and the conclusions drawn would strongly advise against such

procedures. The risk of life threatening complications is a potential for any

surgery which may contribute to obstruction of the airway. One of the

consultants of the Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Unit, The University of

Adelaide, experienced such a complication following tongue reduction,

performed in preparation for orthognathic surgery. The patient in this case

required re-intubation and admission to the intensive care unit for further

monitoring and management. This involved a transfer from one of the

peripheral private hospitals to the Royal Adelaide Hospital, a major teaching

hospital in South Australia. Once the airway was secured no further

complicating events ensued and the patient recovered fully.

Changes in masticatory function have been reported following mandibular

setback procedures. Moss (1973) using electromyographic techniques showed a

distinctive pattern of muscle activity, pre and postoperatively. Further studies

by Moss (1984) demonstrated that an increase in activity of anterior temporal

and posterior masseter muscles was recorded following mandibular setback and

if these were not evident then a tendency towards relapse would be expected.

This increased muscle activity was correlated to the fact that these muscles were

less active in the untreated prognathic mandible and therefore if remained

inactive would tend to reposition itself back to its original position. A recent

publication (Raustia and Oikarinen, 7994) also confirmed similar findings of

increased activity of the masseter and temporal muscles following mandibular

setback surgery.

Page 189: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

789

11..9 GROWTH

The timing of orthognathic surgery is an important factor in minimising relapse

secondary to growth. Freihofer (7982) remarked upon postoperative instability

after correction of the prognathism in patients operated on before 17 years of age.

Although, in this study, no evidence of relapse was found when the results

were reviewed, there was only one case of relapse (Figure 11.1) identified on

clinical review, and this was clearly associated with mandibular growth as the

patient had reported substantial increase in height postoperatively. This patient

underwent orthognathic surgery at age 76 at a time when his skeletal maturity

was thought to have neared completion. He presented for review again five

years postoperatively. He had stated that he had grown in height and analysis of

serial lateral cephalograms showed that further mandibular growth had

contributed to relapse following the initial orthognathic surgery. An offer of

further orthognathic surgery was made and this was accepted. The work-up to

follow includes a bone scan to assess whether there was any evidence of

pathological or continued activity of the condyles. This scan was reported as

showing no further growth activity and therefore further orthognathic surgery

is being planned for this patient to correct the dentofacial deformity. Some

authors contend that surgical correction of mandibular prognathism can be

carried out at a very early age (Biederman, 7967; Ware and Taylor,7968; Isaccson

et al. 1978; Macintosh, 7987; Lehman, 1981). Other authors caution against such

corrections prior to growth maturity since individuals with Class III

malocclusions tend to have a prolonged period of mandibular growth

(Goldstein, 7947; Proffit and White , 7970; Hinds and Kent, 7972). It is the view of

this Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Unit, University of Adetaide, that treatment

of mandibular prognathism should not be undertaken until the completion of

growth and although its assessment is difficult many methods are available to

Page 190: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

790

provide some scientific basis to this problem (Rosenquist et aI. 1.986; Sorokolit

and Nanda,'1.990).

Page 191: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

197

Figure 1L.1 Mandibular relapse identified on clinical review

L

Page 192: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

792

L1.L0 SINGLE JAW aersus BIMAXILLARY PROCEDURES

The literature suggests that bimaxillary procedures are more stable than single

jaw procedures (Kahnberg and Ridell, 198s). Franco et al. (1,989), however,

showed no significant differences between the one or two jaw groups for any

predictor of relapse at different time intervals. In this study, there was no

evidence of any differences in relapse found when comparing bimaxillary

procedures to single jaw procedures although the sample size did not warrant

statistical comparison as only two single jaw procedures were performed in this

study. Bimaxillary surgery was the common surgical procedure performed due

to the magnitude of the discrepancy between maxilla and mandible. Kahnberg

and Ridell (1988) suggested that the amount of mandibular relapse tends to be

less in bimaxillary cases than in mandibular surgery alone probably because the

setback in bimaxillary cases is proportioned between the maxilla and mandible,

implying that the greater the amount of setback, the greater the relapse

potential.

11.17 CORONOIDECTOMY

Removal of the coronoid process has been advocated to allow setback of the

distal segment of the mandible following osteotomy. No coronoidectomies

were performed in this study as no difficulties were experienced in the

mandibular setback.

1']..12 HIGH ANGLE MANDIBLES

The obtuse gonial angle is a characteristic feature of the prognathic mandible.

The construction of the gonial angle is difficult when the procedure of vertical

subsigmoid osteotomy is undertaken to set the mandible back. Usually this

Page 193: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

793

procedure leaves the distal tip of the proximal fragment 'overhanging' the lower

border of the mandible and the point gonion is arbitrarily identified by the

intersection of the tangents to the lower border of the mandible and the

posterior border of the mandible. Due to changes that occur following surgery

the 'overhanging' distal tip of the proximal fragment is completely remodelled

and consequently the point gonion moves as resorption occurs. This ultimately

affects the linear and angular measurements associated with this point. In this

study the gonial angle was found to decrease following surgery and relapsed

further than the initial shift. This change did not affect the stability of the

vertical subsigmoid osteotomy procedure. One explanation is that resorptive

changes in the gonial region can alter the gonial angle unfavourably (Shepherd,

1980) without causing a forward shift of the mandible.

Page 194: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

794

VII

CONCTUSIONS

Page 195: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

195

1

CHAPTER 12

CONCLUSIONS

The results of this study showed that no statistically significant relapse

occurred in the short, intermediate nor long term. Therefore, the

technique of vertical subsigmoid osteotomy is a stable procedure.

2. No significant differences in relapse could be assigned to age nor to the

differences in sexes in any period of study.

3. The period of maxillomandibular fixation had no influence on relapse of

mandibular setback.

4. The procedure of vertical subsigmoid osteotomy was stable whether

orthodontics was undertaken prior to surgery or whether no orthodontics

was used at all.

Displacement of the condyle occurred during the period of fixation but

returned to its preoperative position in the intermediate and long term.

The anterior facial height decreased during the period of fixation but

relapsed to its preoperative height.

Both the gonial and ramal angles were displaced in a clockwise direction

by the setback of the mandible but returned to the preoperative position

with no relapse of the mandibular setback.

5

6

7

Page 196: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

796

8.

9

The type of surgery, whether single jaw or bimaxillary, did not influence

relapse. Similarly segmentalization of the maxilla had no influence.

Relapse of the maxilla following advancement was statistically

significant. This is contrary to the literature which generally states that

maxillary advancement is stable.

The orthodontic decompensation of the upper and lower incisors proved

to be unstable with relapse of both the upper and lower dentition. This

did not influence the stability of the surgical changes.

Positive overjet and overbite were achieved with minimal relapse and no

tendency towards open bite following long term follow-up.

The hyoid position altered significantly following mandibular setback.

Initially, following surgery, the hyoid bone returned to its preoperative

position horizontally but moved superiorly. In the long term the hyoid

bone was positioned more superiorly than its preoperative position.

Consequently, the tongue position (indicated by hyoid position) had no

influence on relapse following vertical subsigmoid osteotomy.

The airway depth increased following mandibular setback.

10.

11.

12.

13.

Page 197: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

197

VII

APPENDIX

Page 198: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

198

APPENDIX

INTRAORAL VERTICAL SUBSIGMOID OSTEOTOMY

1. INDICATIONS

(a) Mandibular anteroposterior excess assessed on cephalometric and clinical

analysis

þ) For minor setback of mandible (less than 10 mm), minor mandibular

asymmetry and corrections of vertical discrepancies in the mandibular

ramus

2.

(a)

(b)

CONTRAINDICATIONS

Airway compromise

Intermaxillary fixation not advisable

PREOPERATIVE WORK UP

Before ailmission

Orthognathic Surgery work up as per major surgery protocol, Oral and

Maxillofacial Surgery Unit, University of Adelaide. This involves the

following:

(i) Clinical and medical assessment;

(ii) Anaesthetic assessment;

(iii) Autologous blood donations;

(iv) Radiographs - lateral head cephalogram, orthopantomogram,

posteroanterior cephalogram;

(v) Photographs of face and dentition;

(vi) Quick Cephru analysis;

3.

3.7

(a)

Page 199: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

199

(b)

(c)

3.2

(a)

þ)(c)

(d)

(vii) Study models;

(viii) Body image and Illness behaviour questionnaire; and

(ix) Oral and Mafllofacial Surgery Unit clinical work up sheets

Model surgery to indicate movements and construction of occlusal wafer

Confirm means of maxillomandibular fixation:

(i) arch bars; and

(ii) orthodontic bands on 1st molars, premolars and canines and high

hat pins

On øilmission:

Full presurgical work up;

Check accuracy of occlusal wafer;

Notify theatre - osteotomy instrument requirements; and

Notify higher dependency ward

4. OPERATIVE PROCEDURE

4.7 Anøesthesia

(a) Advise anaesthetist of the use of maxillomandibular fixation during and

at the completion of operation;

þ) Nasoendotracheal intubation;

(c) Standard anaesthetic medications; and

(d) Standard anaesthetic monitoring which routinely involved:

(i) pulse oximetry

(ii) cù(iii) blood pressure

(iv) pulse rate

(v) tidal volume

(vi) ECG

Page 200: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

200

4.2

(a)

4.3

(a)

(b)

(c)

Instruments

Obwegeser osteotomy tray:

(i) 2 stripping periosteal elevators (small and large) needed;

(ii) Sagittal saw and 120 degree right angle saw blade needed;

(iii) Sigmoid retractors needed; and

(iv) Le Vasseur Merrill retractors needed

Preparation

Intravenous dexamethasone 8 milligrams and cephalothin L gram;

1.Vo Corlrcf ointment to lips; and

Clean and prepare in conventional way for intraoral operation

Access:

Cheek and tongue retractors are positioned (assistant number 2);

Arch bars are ligated to teeth if necessary; and

Haemostasis: infiltrate along ramal border with Xylocaine 2Vo and

adrenalin 1/80000. 4 mls each side

Mu cop erio ste al Refle ctio n :

Lateral aspect of the anterior angle of mandible to subsigmoid notch;

Do not strip off the fibres of masseter that are attached to the notch at the

mandibular angle;

Use two periosteal elevators to reflect (small and medium);

4,4

(a)

(b)

(c)

4.6

(a)

þ)

4.5 Incision:

(a) Along external oblique ridge similar to incision for sagittal split

osteotomy; and

(b) From approfmately a quarter way up ascending ramus to the 2nd molar

Ensure the incision is not made too high

(c)

Page 201: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

201

(d)

(e)

(f)

Place a forked Langenbeck at the anterior ramal border;

Establish the position of the sigmoid notch at the superior aspect of

reflection;

After stripping posteriorly and inferiorly, place a fibre optic retractor distal

to the posterior ramal border;

Locate the condyle; and

Locate the angle

Bone cuts

After locating the antilingula (if present) commence bony cut with 120

degree right angle sagittal saw blade positioned in middle of ramus

between sigmoid notch and mandibular angle;

Angle the saw so that its action gives maximum mechanical advantage;

After the bone cut has been made through both plates in the centre

continue superiorly in the see-sawing manner;

Stop short of the sigmoid notch by 2-3 mm and check cut with a No. 6

Ash plastic;

If free continue superiorly, if there are spurs remaining deepen them

with the saw cut;

Once the upper 1,/2 is sectioned, the lower 7/2 is cut by using the saw in

the manner described in (c); and

Check with No. 6 Ash plastic to make sure bone cut is completely through

The angle of the saw will ensure that the saw cut is oblique to minimise

damage to the inferior dental nerve

4.8 Separøtion

(a) If not mobile complete split wittr curved Obwegeser osteotome;

(e)

(h)

4.7

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

(g)

NB

Page 202: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

202

(b) Insert two periosteal elevators, superior and inferior and check mobitity

of fragments;

(c) To remove Le Vausser Merrill retractor, insert an elevator medial to the

proximal fragment so that this fragment is not displaced medially on

removal of the retractor; and

(d) Repeat procedure for other side after placing moist tampon at surgical site

4.9

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

Fixøtion

Check occlusion with wafer;

Check that proúmal fragments of ramus are lateral to distal fragments;

Remove throat pack and suction out pharynx;

Apply maxillomandibular fixation with 26 gauge wire; and

Soft tissue closure with 3/0 chromic cat gut sutu¡e

5.1

(a)

o)

5. POSTOPERATIVE MANAGEMENT

Immediate

High dependency recovery for first 24 hours;

Intravenous dexamethasone 8 milligrams L2 hourly and cephalothin 1

gram 6 hourly for 48 hours postoperatively;

Narcotic analgesia intravenously or intramuscularly 4 hourly prn is

gradually replaced with paracetamol-codeine preparations; and

Clear fluids are given in the first 24 hours

(c)

(d)

Page 203: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

203

5.2

(a)

þ)

Postoperøtioe recooery

Oral intake and ambulation are encouraged; and

Postoperative lateral head cephalogram, PA mandible and OPG are taken

as early as possible to confirm the accuracy of surgery, in particular the

proximal fragments of the mandible are laterally positioned and the

condylar heads are enlocated.

Page 204: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

204

VIII

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Page 205: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

20s

BIBLIOGRAPFIY

Abe, M., Ohashi, Y., Igarashi, K. et al. (1980)

Evaluation of Obwegeser - Dal Pont's method in 9 patients.

Ipn. I. Oral Maxillofac. S*9. 26: 1,528.

Adamidis, I.P., Spyropolous, M.N. (7992)

Hyoid bone position and orientation in class I and class III malocclusions.

Am.I. Orthod. Dentofac. Orthop. 101: 308-312.

Ahlen, K., Rosenquist, I. (1990)

Anterior skeletal fixation as an adjunct to oblique sliding osteotomy of

the mandibular ramus.

f. Craniomaxillofac. S*9. 18: 1,47 -750.

Ahlqvist, J., Eliassoh, S., Welander, U. (1983)

The cephalometric projection. Part II: Principles of image distortion in

cephalography.

Dentomaxillofac. Radiol. 12: 101-108.

Akin, R. K., Walters, P.J.í975)

Experience with the intraoral vertical subcondylar osteotomy.

J. Oral S*9. 33: 343-345.

Aleman, D. (1921)

Ny operation for progeni.

Svensk tandlak-T 1,4: 787-1.84

Page 206: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

206

Alling, C.C. (1961)

Mandibular Prognathism.

Oral Surg.74:3-22 Supplement 1.

Alling, C.C. (1965)

Correction of mandibular prognathism by open oblique sliding

osteotomies of the rami.

|. Oral S*9. 23:199-217.

Artun, ]., Krogstad, O., Little, R. M. (1990)

Stability of mandibular incisors following excessive proclination: a study

in adults with surgically treated mandibular prognathism.

Angle Orthod. 60: 99-"1.06.

Astrand, P., Bergljung,L., Nord, P.G. (1973)

Oblique sliding osteotomy of the mandibular rami in 55 patients with

mandibular prognathism.

Int. J. Oral Surg. 2:89-'1.01,.

Astrand, P., Ericson, S. (1974)

Relation between fragments after oblique sliding osteotomy of the

mandibular rami and its influence on postoperative conditions.

Int. J. Oral Surg.3:49-59.

Astrand, P., Ridell A. (1973)

Positional changes of the mandible and the upper and lower anterior

teeth after oblique sliding osteotomy of the mandibular rami.

Scand. J. Plast. Reconstr. Srtg. 7:120-129.

Page 207: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

207

Athanasiou, 4.E., Toutountzakis, N., Mavreas, D., Ritzau, M., Wenzel, A. (1,991)

Alterations of hyoid bone position and pharyngeal depth and their

relationship after surgical correction of mandibular prognathism.

Am. J.Orthod. Dentofac. Orthop. 1.00: 259-65.

Athanasiou,4.E., Toutountzakis, N., Mavreas,D, Ritzau, M. (1,992)

Skeletal stability after surgical correction of mandibular prognathism by

vertical ramus osteotomy.

Eur. I. Orthod. 74: 777-24.

Babcock, W.W. (1909)

Malocclusion of teeth.

¡. Am. Med. Ass.53:833-838.

Bambha, I.K. (1961)

Longitudinal cephalometric roentgenographic study of face and cranium

in relation to body height.

J. Am. Dent. Ass. 63: 776-799.

Barton, D.V., Harris, A.W. (1970)

An investigation of the efficiency of the oral airway and a technique

for improving the airway in the early postoperative period following

mandibular osteotomy.

Br. I. Oral Surg. 8: 76-26.

Battagel, J.M. (1993)

A comparative assessment of cephalometric errors.

Eur. J. Ortho. 15: 305-314.

Page 208: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

208

Baum, A.T. (1966)

Orthodontic treatment and the maturing face.

Angle Orthod. 36: 121.-735.

Baumrind, S., Frantz, R.C. (1977a)

The reliability of head film measurements. 1. Landmark identification.

Am. J. Orthod. 60:1,1,1,-127.

Baumrind, S., Frantz, R.C. (1,977b)

The reliability of head film measurements. 2. Conventional angular and

linear measures.

Am. I. Orthod. 60: 505-517.

Baumrind, S., Miller, D., Molthen, R. (1976)

The reliability of head film measurements. 3. Tracing superimposition.

Am. I. Orthod. 70:617-644.

Baumrind, S., Morrill, L., Miller, D. (1974)

Post surgical changes in mandibular orientation following vertical

osteotomy for prognathism.

J. Dent. Res. 53 (special issue): 273 abstract no. 875.

Baum¡ind, S., Miller, D.M. (1980)

Computer aided head film analysis: The University of California San

Francisco method.

Am. I. Orthod. 78:47-65.

Page 209: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

209

Bear, S.E., Priest, J.H. (19S0)

Sleep apnea syndrome: Correction with surgical advancement of the

mandible.

J. Oral Sutg.38:543-9.

Becker, R. (1966)

Erfolge und Misserfolge beider Progeniebehandlung und ihre Ursachen.

Dtsch Zahnarutebl 24: 7 66-77 6.

Becker, R. (1966)

Die Zungenverkleinerung zu¡ Unterstutzung der Kieferorthopadischen

Behandlung.

Dtsch. Zahn'Mund-Kiefer-Heilkd 46: 270-279.

Behrman, S.J. 0972)

Complications of sagittal split osteotomy of the mandible

J. Oral Surg. 30: 554-561.

Bell, W.H. (1973)

Biologic basis for maxillary osteotomies.

Am. I. Phys. Anthropol. SS: 279-290.

Bell, W.H. (1975)

The Le Fort I osteotomy for correction of maxillary deformities.

J. Oral S*9. 33:472426.

Page 210: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

21,0

Bell, W.H., Scheideman/ G.B. (1981)

Correction of vertical maxillary deficiency: stability and soft tissue

changes.

J. Oral S*9. 39:666-670.

Bell, W.H., Kennedy,I.W., Levy, B.M. (7974)

Revascularisation and bone healing following oblique osteotomy of the

mandible.

J. Dent Res. 53: 130 (special issue) abstract no. 302.

Bell, W.H., Creekmore, T.D. (7973)

Surgical - orthodontic correction of mandibular prognathism.

Am. I. Orthod. 63:256-270.

Bell, w.H., Proffit, w.R., white, R.p. (1990)

Surgical Correction of Dentofacial Deformities.

W.B. Saunders Co. Philadelphia.

Bell, W.H., Yamaguchi, Y., Poor, M.R. (1990)

Treatment of temporomandibular joint dysfunction by intraoral vertical

osteotomy.

Int J. Adult Orthod. Orthognattu Surg. 5: 9.

Berger, P. (7897)

Du traitement chirurgical du prognathisme.

These. Lyon.

Page 211: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

217

Bergersen, E.O. (1980)

Enlargement and distortion in cephalometric radiography:

compensation tables for linear measurement.

Angle Orthod. 50: 230-2M.

Bergin, R., Hallenberg, J., Malmgren, O. (1978)

Computerised cephalometrics.

Acta. Odontol. Scand. 36: 349-357.

Berman, R.J., Behram, S.I. Í978)

Surgical treatment of skeletal open bite deformity using bilateral sagittat

ramus osteotomy. Chicago, AAOMS 60th Annual meeting.

cited in Epker, B.N.; Wessberg, G.A. (1982)

Br. I. Oral Surg. 20: 175-"182.

Mechanisms of early skeletal relapse following surgical advancement of

the mandible.

Biederman, W. (1,967)

The orthodontist's role in resecting the prognathic mandible

Am. I. Orthod. 53: 356-375.

Bjork A. (7947)

The face in profile.

Svensk. TandlakTids. 40 (suppt. 5).

Bjork A. (1963)

Variations in the growth pattern of the human mandible: longitudinal

radiographic study by the implant method.

J. Dent. Res.42: 40041,7.

Page 212: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

212

Bjork A. (19s5)

Facial growth in man, studied with the aid of metallic implants.

Acta Odontol. Scand. 13:9-34.

Bjork, A. and Palling, M. (1954)

Adolescent age change in sagittal jaw relation, alveolar prognathy and

incisal inclination.

Acta. Odontol. Scand. 12:207-232.

Bjork, 4., Solow, B. (1,962)

Measurements on radiographs.

J. Dent. Res.41: 672-683.

Blair, V. P. (7907)

Operations on the jaw bone and face.

Surg. Gynec. & Obst 4:67-68.

Blaseio, G.

Quick Cephru reference guide.

Orthodontic Processing, Loma Linda. p.32.

Bondevik, O., Rosler, M., Slagsvold, O. (1981)

The digital read out system CM-1: an instrument for rationing

measu¡ing on radiographic headplates and dental models.

Eur. J. Orthod.3: 1-8.

Bo1me, P.I. (1966)

Osseous healing after oblique osteotomy of the mandibular ramus

J. Oral S*9. 24: 125-1.33.

Page 213: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

273

Braun, T.W., Sotereanos, G.C. (1933)

The styloid process as an anatomic hindrance in orthognathic surgery.

f. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 47:676-679.

Broch, j., Slagsvold, O., Rosler, M. (1981)

Error in landmark identification in lateral radiographic headplates.

Eur.I. Orthod. 3:9-73.

Brodie, A.G. (1955)

The behaviour of the cranial base and its components as revealed by

serial cephalometric roentgenograms.

Angle Orthod. 25: 1,48-760.

Brown, T. (1,973)

Material and methods. In: Morphology ot the Australian Skull studied by

multivariate analysis.

Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, Canberra. pp. 6-21.

Brown, T., Barrett,M.J., Clarke, H.T. (1970)

Refinement of metric data from cephalograms and other records

Aust. Dent. l. 75: 482-486.

Brown, T., Barrett,M.J., Grave, K.C. (1971)

Facial growth and skeletal maturation at adolescence.

Tandlaegebladet. 7 5: 121,7 -7222.

Buchanon, R.T. and Levine, N.S. (1983)

Nutritional support of the surgical patient.

Ann. Plast Srrg. 70:759-766.

Page 214: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

21.4

Burk, N. (1968)

Correction of mandibular prognathism with variation of vertical

osteotomy: report of case.

J. Oral S*9. 26:297-294.

Burstone, C. (7967)

Lip posture and its significance in treatment planning.

Am. J. Orthod. 53:262-2M.

Burstone, C.J.0978)

Cephalometrics for orthognathic surgery

f. Oral Sutg. 36:269-277.

Buschang,P.H., Tanguay, R., Demirjian, A. (1987)

Cephalometric reliability: A full ANOVA model for the estimation of

true and error variance.

Angle Orthod. 57 :768-77 5.

Calderon, S., Gal, G., Anavi, Y., Gonshorowitz, M. (7992)

Techniques for ensuring the lateral position of the proximal segment

following intraoral vertical ramus osteotomy.

j. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 50:704Ç7.

Caldwell, J.8., Letterman, G.S. (1954)

Vertical osteotomy in the mandibular rami for correction of

prognathism.

I. Oral S*9. 12:185-200.

Page 215: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

275

Calloway, D.H., Spector, H. (19il)

Nitrogen balance as related to caloric and protein intake in active young

men.

Amer. I. Clin. Nutr. 2:405-412.

Carlotti, 4.8., Schendel, S.A. (1987)

An analysis of factors influencing stability of surgical advancement of

maxilla by the Le Fort I osteotomy.

f. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 45:92Ç928.

Carlsson, G.E. (1967)

Error in X-ray cephalometry. A method study and a longitudinal

investigation of the facial skeleton on series with and without natu¡al

teeth over a 5 year period.

OdonL T.75:99-129.

Chate, R.A.C. (1987)

Cephalometric landmark identification within the petrous temporal

region.

Br. I. Orthod. 1.4:33-47.

Choung, P.H. (1992)

A new osteotomy for the correction of mandibular prognathism:

techniques and rationale of the intraoral vertico-sagittal osteotomy

j. Craniomaxillofac. S*9. 20: 1.53-'1,62.

Cohen, A.M. (1984)

Uncertainty in cephalometrics

Br. I. Orthdod. 11.: 4448.

Page 216: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

276

Cook, R., Flinrichsery G. (7973)

The mandibular sagittal split osteotomy - a clinical and cephalometric

revlew.

Oral Surgery Transacl IVth Int. Conf. on Oral Sutg.

Copenhagen: Munksgaard.

Coghlan, K.M. and lrvine, G.H. (1986)

Neurological damage after sagittal split osteotomy.

Int. J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 15:369-377.

Dal Pont, G. (1961)

Retromolar osteotomy for the correction of prognathism.

|. Oral Surg.,Anaesth. & Hosp. Serv. 19:43-47.

Dewan, S.K., Marjadi, U.K. (1983)

Soft tissue changes in surgically treated cases of bimaxillary protrusion.

|. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 47:11.6-'1,18.

Dingman, R.O. (19M)

Osteotomy for the correction of mandibular malrelation of

developmental origin.

J. OraI Sutg. 2: 239-259.

Downs, W.B. (1956)

Analysis of the dentofacial profile.

Angle Orthod. 26: 797-212.

Page 217: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

277

Doyle, M. G. (1986)

Stability and complications in 50 consecutively treated surgical

orthodontic patients: a retrospective longitudinal analysis from private

practice.

Int J. Adutt Orthod. Orthognattu Surg. 1:23-36.

Eckerdal, O., Sund, G., Astrand, P. (1986)

Skeletal remodelling in the temporomandibular joint after oblique

sliding osteotomy of the mandibular rami.

Int. f. Oral Maxillofac. S*9. 15:233-239.

Edlund, |., Hansso\,T., Petersson,4., Willmar K. (7979)

Sagittal splitting of the mandibular ramus.

Scand. J. Plast. Reconstr. S*9. 13:437-M3.

Egyedi, P., Houwing, M., Juten E. (1981)

The oblique subcondylar osteotomy: report of results of 100 cases

f. Oral S*9. 39:87'1,-873.

Egyedi, P., Obwegeser, H. (1964)

Zur Operativen Zungenverkleinerung.

Kieferheilkd 41 : 76-25.

Egyedi,P., Obwegeser, H. (7976)

Indications for reduction of tongue in surgical treatrnent of mandibular

prognathism.

Int. f. Oral Surg. 5: "1.07-'1.'1.0.

Page 218: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

278

Eliasson, S., Welander, IJ., Ahlqvist, J. í982)

The cephalographic projection. Part I General consideration.

Dento Maxillo Fac. Radiol. 71,: 1,17-122.

Ellis, E., McNamara,J.A. (19U)

Components of adult class III malocclusion

J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 42:295-305.

Enlow, D.H., Harris, D.B. (1964)

A study of postnatal growth of the human mandible.

Am. I. Orthodont. 50: 25-50.

Epker,8.N., Wessberg, G.A. (7982)

Mechanisms of early skeletal relapse following surgical advancement of

the mandible.

Br. I. Oral Surg.20: 175-182.

Epker, B.N. Fish, L.C. (1985)

Dentofacial deformities: Integrated orthodontic and surgical conection.

C.V. Mosby Co. St. Louis.

Eriksen, E. and Solow, B. (1991)

Linearity of cephalometric digitizers

Eur. J. Orthod. 73:337-M2.

Fallender,L.G., Leban, S.G., Williams, F.A. (1987)

Post operative nutritional support in oral and maxillofacial surgery.

I. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 45:32Ç330.

Page 219: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

279

Farrer, S. (1984)

Changes resulting from Begg orthodontic treatment with emphasis on

the soft tissue profile.

MDS Thesis, The Universify of Adelaide, South Australia.

Finlay, L.M. (1980)

Craniometry and cephalometry: A history prior to the advent of

radiography.

Angle Orthod. 50: 312-321..

Fish, L.C., Epker, B.N. (1986)

Prevention of relapse in surgical - orthodontic treatment. Part I :

mandibular procedures.

]. Clin Orthod. 20:826-M1,.

Franco, J.E., Van Sickels, J.E., Thrash, W.J. (1989)

Factors contributing to relapse in rigidly fixed mandibular setbacks.

|. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 47:451.-456.

Freihofer, H.P.M., Petresevic, D. (1975)

Late results after advancing the mandibte by sagittal splitting of the rami.

f. Maxillofac. Surg. 3: 250-257.

Freihofer, H.P.M. (197 6)

Probleme der behandlung der progenie durch sagittale spaltung der

aufsteigenden unterkieferaste.

Schweiz Mschr. Zahnheilk 87 72.

Page 220: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

220

Freihofer, H.P.M. (1,982)

The timing of facial osteotomies in children and adolescents

Clinics in Plastic S*9. 9:445-455.

Fromm, 8., Nordh, F., Nordstrom, R. (1962)

Die mandibulare protrusion.

Acta Otolaryngol. 55: 42GM2.

Georgiade, N.G., Quinn, G.W. (7967)

Newer concepts in surgical correction of mandibular prognathism

Plast. Reconstr. Sutg. 27: 1.85-193.

Glogoff, M.R., Baum, S.M., Cheifetz,l. (1981)

Diagnosis and treatrnent of Eagle's syndrome.

J. Oral S*9. 39:87"1,-873.

Goldstein, A. (1,947)

Appraisal of results of surgical correction of class III malocclusions.

Angle Orthod. 17: 59-9"1,.

Goldspink, G. A., Anderson, D.1., Matthews B. (197 6)

The adaptation of muscle to a new functional length in mastication.

John Wright and Sons Ltd. Bristol, pp. 35-41..

Goss, 4.N., Chau, K.K., Mayne, L.H. (7979)

Intermaxillary fixation. How practicable is emergenry jaw release?

Anaesthesia and Intensive Care 7: 253-257.

Page 221: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

221,

Graber, T.M. (7972)

Orthodontics - Principles and practice (3rd edn)

W.B. Sauders Co. p.75.

Graber, T.M. (1958)

Implementation of the roentgenographic cephalometric technique.

Am. J. Orthod. M:906-93'1,.

Grammer, F.C., Meyer, M.W., Richter, K.l. (7974)

A radioisotope study of the vascular response to sagittal split osteotomy

of the mandible.

J. Oral S*9. 32:578-582.

Grammer,F.C., Carpenter A. (1979)

A quantitative histologic study of tissue responses to ramal sagittal

splitting procedures.

J. Oral Sutg. 37:482485.

Grant, P.G. (1973)

Biochemical significance of the instantaneous centre of rotation: The

human temporomandibular joint.

]. Biomechanics 6:'1,09-113.

Grave, K.C., Brown, T. (1976)

Skeletal ossification and the adolescent growth spurt.

Am. I. Orthod. 69: 61,1,-679.

Page 222: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

222

Gravely, J.F., Murray-Benzie s, P. (1974)

The clinical significance of tracing error in cephalometry.

Br. I. Orthod. 1: 95-101.

Greco, J.M., Fromberg U., Van Sickels, J.E. (1990)

Long term airway space changes after mandibular setback using bilateral

sagittal split osteotomy.

Int. |. Oral Maxillofac. S*9. 19: 103-105.

Hall, H.D., Chase, D.C., Payor L.G. (1975)

Evaluation and refinement of the intraoral vertical subcondylar

osteotomy.

I. Oral Sutg.33: 333-341.

Hall, H.D. (1991)

Letters to the editor: Avoiding condylar sag.

J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 49:7255.

Hall, H.D., Mckenna, S.I. (1987)

Further refinement and evaluation of intraoral vertical ramus

osteotomy.

J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 45:684-688.

Hall, H.D., Nickerson,J.W., Mckenna, S.l. (1993)

Modified condylotomy for the treatment of the painful

temporomandibular joint with a reducing disc.

J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 51,:733-742.

Page 223: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

223

Hallert, B. (1964)

Glossary of some tenns and expressions used in the theory of errors of

photogrammetry. International Society for Photogrammetry,

Commission VI.

Flansson, T. (1,9n)

Temporomandibular joint changes. Occurrence and development.

Diss. University of Lund, Sweden.

Harsha, W.M. (1912)

Bilateral resection of the jaw for prognathism.

Surg., Gynec & Obst 15:51.

Hase, M.P. (1988)

Condylar position in correction of dentofacial deformities.

Aust. Orthod. J. 10: 217-220.

Hatton, M.E., Grainger, R.M. (1958)

Reliability of measurements from cephalograms at the Burlington

orthodontic research centre.

J. Dent. Res. 37: 853-859.

Hayes, M.A. (1959)

Post operative diet therapy.

f. Amer. Diet. Assn. 35:17-78.

Page 224: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

224

Hebert, J.M., Kent,I.N., Hinds, E.C. (1970)

Correction of prognathism by an intraoral vertical subcondylar

osteotomy.

j. Oral Sutg. 28: 651.-653.

Hedemark, 4.H., Freihofer, H.P. (1978)

The behaviour of the maxilla in vertical movements after Le Fort I

osteotomy.

|. Maxillofac. Surg. 6:244-1249.

Hempenstall, R. B. (1980)

Fractu¡e treatment and healing.

Philadelphia, W.B. Saunders.

Hendersor, D., Poswillo, D. (1985)

Orthognathic surgery.

Wolfe Medical Publications, London.

Hillesund, E., Fjeld,D., Zacluisson, B.U. (1978)

Reliability of soft tissue profile in cephalometrics.

Am. I. Orthod. 74:537-550.

Hinds, E.C. (1957)

Surgical correction of acquired mandibular deformities.

Am. I. Orthod. 43:760-173.

Hinds, E.C. (1958)

Correction of prognathism by subcondylar osteotomy.

J. Oral Surg. "1.6:209-21,4.

Page 225: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

225

Hinds, E.C., Kent, J.N. (7969)

Diagnosis and selection surgical procedures in management of open bite.

J. Oral Sutg. 27:939-949.

Hinds, E.C., Kent, J.N. (7972)

Surgical treatment of developmental iaw deformities.

C.V. Mosby Co., St. Louis.

Hing, R.N. (1989)

Cephalometric evaluation of mandibular relapse following bilateral

sagittal split osteotomy.

MDS Thesis, University of Adelaide, South Australia.

Hixon, E.H. (1956)

The norm concept and cephalometrics.

Am. J. Orthod. 42:898-900.

Hirose, T., Nakajima,T., Kajikawa, Y., Tokiwâ, N., Hanada, K.,

Fukuhara , T. (1976)

Surgical - orthodontic approach to skeletal class III malocclusion.

I. Oral S*9. 34:980-987.

Hogeman, K.E. (7967)

Surgical and dental - orthopaedic correction of horizontal and vertical

malocclusions.

Scand. J. Plast. Reconstr. Sutg. 1:45-50.

Page 226: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

226

Hogeman, K.E. (1951)

Surgical-orthopaedic correction of mandibular protrusion.

Acta Chir. Scand. Suppl.159.

Ho gevold, H.8., Trumpy, I.G., Skjelkbr ed, P ., Lyber g, T. (1991 )

Extraoral subcondylar ramus osteotomy for correction of mandibular

prognathism. The surgical techniques and complications.

|. Craniomaxillofac. Surg. 19: 34'1,-345.

Hollender, L., Ridell, A. (1974)

Radiography of the temporomandibular joint after oblique sliding

osteotomy of the mandibular rami.

Scand. |. Dent Res.82: 466-469.

Horowitz , 5.L., Converse , J.M., Gersfrnan , L.J. í969)

Craniofacial relationships in mandibular prognathism

Arch. Oral Biol . 14: 727-13'1,.

Flouston, W.l.B. (1982)

A comparison of the reliability of measurement of cephalometric

radiographs by tracing and direct digitisation.

Swed. Dent. |. Suppt. 15: 99-103.

Houston, W.l.B. (1983)

The analysis of errors in orthodontic measurements.

Am. I. Orthod. 83: 382-390.

Page 227: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

227

F{ouston, W.I.B. and Lee, R. T. (1985)

Accuracy of different methods of radiographic superimposition on

cranial base structures.

Eur. J. Orthod. 7: 127-735.

Houston, W.I.B., Maher, R.E., McElroy, D. and Sherrifl M. (1986)

Sources of error in measurements from cephalometric radiographs.

Eur. J. Orthod. S: 149-151.

Hovell, J.H. (1964)

Muscular patterning factors in the surgical correction of mandibular

prognathism.

J. Oral Surg. 22:1,22-126.

Huang, C.S., Ross, R.B. (1982)

Surgical advancement of the retrognathic mandible in growing children.

Am.I. Orthod. Dentofac. Orthop.82: 89-103.

Huber, R.E. Reynolds, J.W. (1946)

A dentofacial study of male students at the University of Michigan in the

Physical Hardening Program.

Am. I. Orthod. 32:1.-21..

Hullihen, S.P. (1849)

Case of elongation of the underjaw and distortion of the face and neck

caused by a burn, successfully treatcd.

Am.I. Dent. Sc.9: 1,57-1.65.

Page 228: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

228

Flunter, C. I. (1966)

The correlation of facial growth with body height and skeletal

maturation at adolescence.

Angle Orthod. 36: M-54.

Hurst, R.V., Schwaninger,B., Shaye, R., Chadha, J.M. (1978)

Landmark identification accuracy in xeroradiographic cephalometry.

Am. I. Orthod. 75:568-574.

Ianetti, G., Cascone, P., Belli, E., Cordaro, L. (1989)

Condylar hyperplasia: Cephalometric study, treatment planning and

surgical correction (our experience).

Oral Surg. Oral Med. Oral Path.68:673-681,.

Isaacson R.f., Kopytov O.S., Bevis R.R., Waite D.E. (1978)

Movement of the proximal and distal segments after mandibular ramus

osteotomies.

f. Oral S.trg. 36 263268.

Ive, J., McNeill, R.W., West, R.A. (1977)

Mandibular advancement skeletal and dental changes during fixation.

I. Oral Sutg. 35: 881-886.

Jaboulay,8., Berard, L. (1898)

Traitement chirurgical du prognathisme inferieur

Presse. Med. 6:173-6

Page 229: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

229

Jacobsen, 4., Evans, W.G., Preston, C.G., Sadowsky,P.L. (7974)

Mandibular prognathism.

Amer. J. Orthod. 66:'1,40-171..

Joffe, B.M. (1964)

Presurgical cephalometric evaluation of mandibular prognathism.

Dent. Pract. 14: 508-10.

Joffe, B.M. (1965)

Cephalometric analysis of mandibular prognathism.

|. Dent. Assn S. Afr. Part I 20:1,45-1,56.

Joffe, B.M. (1965)

Cephalometric analysis of mandibular prognathism.

f. Dent. Assn S. Afr. Part II 20:173-180.

Joffe, B.M. (1965)

Cephalometric analysis of mandibular prognathism.

|. Dent. Assn S. Afr. Part III20:212-219.

Johanson, 8., Kahnberg, K.E., Lilja, J., Ridell, A. (1979)

Surgical correction of mandibular prognathism by the oblique sliding

osteotomy.

Scand. J. Plast. Reconstr. Surg. 13:453-460.

Jones, N. B. (1,970)

Dietary needs of the oral surgery patient with comparison of dietary

supplements.

I. Oral Surg. 28:892-897.

Page 230: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

230

]onsson, 8., Svartz, K., Welander, U., Astrand, P. (1981)

Mandibular osteotomies and their effect on the gonial angle.

Int. J. Oral Surg."l,0:1.68-172.

Jonsson, G., Sund, G., Astrand, P. (1983)

Oblique sliding osteotomy - a 5 year follow up study. Abstract 43.

SFOI(/SOF.

Kahnberg, K.E., Ridell, A. (1988)

Combined Le Fort I osteotomy and oblique sliding osteotomy of the

mandibular rami.

J. Craniomaxillofac. Srrg.'1,6:'1,51.-156.

Kahnberg, K.E., Widmark, G. (1988)

Surgical treatment of the open bite deformify.

Int. J. Oral Maxillofac. Sutg. 17:45-48.

Kelsey, C. C. (1968)

Radiographic cephalometric study of surgically corrected mandibular

prognathism.

f. Oral S,ttg. 26:239-248.

Knowles, C. C. (7970)

Long term results of mandibular osteotomy: An interim report on the

treatment of young subjects.

Dent. Pract. 20: 318-330.

Page 231: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

231,

Kobayashi, T.,Watanabe, I., Ueda, K., Nakajima, T. (1936)

Stability of the mandible after sagittal ramus osteotomy for correction of

prognathism.

J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. M:693-697.

Kohn, M.W. (1978)

Analysis of relapse after mandibular advancement surgery.

J. Oral Surg. 36:676-6M.

Kole, H. (1965)

Results, experience and problems in the operative treatment of

anomalies with reverse overbite (mandibular protrusion).

Oral Surg.79:427450.

Kole, H. (1963)

Ergebnisse, Erfahrungen und Probleme zur operativen Behandlung der

progenie.

Dtsch. Zahn-Mund-Kieferheilkd 40: 177 -21,6.

Komori, E., Algase, K., Sugisaki, M., Tanabe, H. (1,987)

Skeletal fixation versus skeletal relapse.

Am.I. Orthod. Dentofac. Orthop. 92:412-427.

Korkhaus, G. (1958)

Fortschr. Kiefer-, Gesichts-chfu. Bd. 4

Georg Thieme, Stuttgart

Page 232: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

232

Koski, K and Virolainen, K. (1956)

On the relationships between roentgenographic lines of reference

Acta Odont. Scand. 14: 23-32.

Kostecka, F. (1928)

Surgical correction of protrusion of the upper and lower jaws.

J. Am. Dent. Assoc. 1,5:363-364.

Kraal, E.R., Valk, P.I.W. (1981)

Orthodontic and surgical considerations in the use of the mandibular

sagittal ramus split for class II skeletal anomalies.

f. Oral Sutg. 39:842-848.

Krogman, W.M. (1958)

,Validation of the roentgenographic cephalometric technique.

Am. I. Orthod. M:933-939.

Kufner, J.0971,)

Four year experience with major maxillary osteotomy lor retrusion.

f. Oral S*9. 29:549-553.

Kundert, M. and Hadjiangelou, O. (1980)

Condylar displacement after sagittal splitting of the mandibular rami. A

short term radiographic study.

J. Maxillofac. Surg. 8:278-287.

Page 233: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

233

Kuo, P.C., West, R.4., Bloomquist, D.S., McNeil, R.W. (7979)

Effect of mandibular osteotomy in three patients with hypersomnia and

sleep apnea.

Oral Surg.48:385-392.

Kurihara, S., Kurodã,T., Miyasaka,T., Noguchi, K., Enomoto, S. (1984)

Cephalometric study of dentofacial changes after orthognathic surgical

correction of mandibular prognathism.

J. Stomatolog. Soc. Jpn.51: 26.

Lake, S. L., McNeill, R.W., Little, R.M., West, R.A. (1981)

Surgical mandibular advancement: a cephalometric analysis of

treatment.

Am. I. Orthod. 80:376-394.

Lanigan, D.T., Hey, J., West, R.A. (1991)

Haemorrhage following mandibular osteotomies: a report of 2'1. cases

f. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 49:713-24.

Last, R.I. (1978)

Anatomy, regional and applied (6th edn).

Churchill Livingstone. p. 382.

Lebanc, J., Turvey, T., Epker,8. (1982)

Results following simultaneous mobilization of the maxilla and

mandible for the correction of dentofacial deformities: Analysis of 100

consecutive patients.

f. Oral Surg. 54:607-612.

Page 234: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

234

Legrell, P.E., Nystrom, E. (1990)

Radiographic study of structural changes on the temporomandibular

joint after oblique sliding osteotomy: comparison between the extra-oral

and intra-oral approaches.

Dentomaxillofac. Radiol 19:'1,45-1.48.

Lehman, J.A. Jr.,Tabbal, N.,Haas, D.G., Flaas, A.I. (1981)

The combined surgical and orthodontic treatment of mandibular

prognathism.

Ann. Plast. Surg. 7:458-63.

Leira, J.I. and Gilhuus-Moe, O.T. (7991,)

Sensory impairment following sagittal split osteotomy for correction of

mandibular retrognathism.

Int J. Adult Orthod. Orthognath. Surg. 6:'1.6'1.-'1.67.

Leonard, M. (1976)

Preventing rotation of the proximal segment in the sagittal ramus split

operation.

|. Oral Sutg. 34:942-943.

Leonard, M. (1985)

Maintenance of condylar position after sagittal split osteotomy of the

mandible.

f. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 43:39"1,-392.

Page 235: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

235

Lello, G.E. (1987)

Skeletal open bite correction by combined Le Fort I osteotomy and

bilateral sagittal split of the mandibular ramus.

f. Maxillofac. Surg. 1,5:732-736.

Lew, K.K., Foong, W.C., Loh, E. (1993)

Malocclusion prevalence in an ethnic Chinese population

Aust. Dent. l.3B: M2-M9.

Lew, K.K.K., Loh, F.C., Yeo, J.F., Loh, H.S. (1990)

Evaluation of soft tissue profile following intraoral ramus osteotomy in

Chinese adults with mandibular prognathism.

Int ]. Adult Orthod. Orthognath. Surg. 5:1,89-197.

Limberg, A. (1925)

Treatment of open bite by means of plastic oblique osteotomy of the

ascending rami of the mandible.

DenL Cosmos 67 : 1,191,-1200.

Lindorf, H.H. (1985)

Maintenance of condylar position after sagittal split osteotomy of the

mandible.

|. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 43:397-392.

Loh, F.C., Yeo, J.F., Loh, H.S. (1989)

Intraoral vertical ramus osteotomy.

Ann. Acc. Med. Singapore 1.8:733-736.

Page 236: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

236

Louis, P.J., Waite,P.D., Austin, B. (1993)

Long term skeletal stability after rigid fixation of Le Fort I osteotomies

with advancements.

Int. J. Oral Maxillofac. Sutg. 22:82-f16.

Lundberg,M. (1972)

Conditions in the temporomandibular joint before and after surgical

correction of mandibular protrusion.

Odontol. Tidskr. 72: 11].,-11,8.

Luyk, N.H. and Ward Booth, R.P. (1985)

The stability of Le Fort I advancement osteotomies using bone plates

without bone grafts.

J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 13:250-253.

Macintosh, R.B. (1981)

Experience with the sagittal osteotomy of the mandibular ramus: a 13 -

year review.

f. Maxillofac. Surg.8: 151-165.

Mackay, F., Jones, J. 4., Thompson, R., Simpson, W. (1,992)

Craniofacial form in class III cases.

Br. I. Orthod. 19:15-20.

Malakouti, B. (7970')

Combined procedures in corrective surgery of prognathism and

associated deformities.

J. Oral Surg. 28:50G515.

Page 237: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

237

Marcotte, M. (1981)

Head posture and dentofacial proportions.

Angle Orthod. 51,: 208-273.

Martis, C.S. (1984)

Complications after mandibular sagittal split osteotomy

|. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 42:707-707.

Massey,8., Chase, D.,Thomas, P., Kohn,M. (7974)

Intraoral oblique osteotomy of the mandibular ramus.

j. Oral S*9. 32:755-759.

McNamara,I. A. (1979)

Neuromuscular adaptation to orthognathic surgery.

cited in Epker,8.N., Wessberg, G.A. (1982)

Br. J. Oral Surg.20:775-1,82.

Mechanisms of early skeletal relapse following surgical advancement of

the mandible.

McNamar a, I. A., Carlson, D.S. (1979)

Quantitative analysis of temporomandibular joint adaptations to

protrusive function.

Amer. J. Orthod. 76: 593-677.

McNamara, J.A., Hinton R.J., Hoffman L. (1982)

Histologic analysis of temporomandibular joint adaptation to protrusive

function in young adult rhesus monkeys (Macaca mulatta).

Amer. I. Orthod. 82: 288-298.

Page 238: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

238

McNamara,I.A. (79U)

A method of cephalometric evaluation.

Amer. J. Orthod.86: M9-469.

McNamara, J.A. (1980)

Functional determinants of craniofacial size and shape.

Eur. ]. Orthod. 2:'1.37-759.

McNeill, R.W., Hooley, J.R. Sundberg, R.J. 0973)

Skeletal relapse during intermaxillary fixation

J. Oral S*9. 31,:212-227.

McWilliam, J.S. (7982)

Orientation of orthogonal coordinate systems used for registration of

cephalometric landmarks.

Scand. J. DenL Res.90: 145-150.

Merkx, M.A.W., Van Damme, P.A. (1994)

Condylar resorption after orthognathic surgery. Evaluation of treatment

in 8 patients.

J. Craniomaxillofac. Surg. 22: 53-58.

Michiwaki, Y., Yoshida, H., Ohno, K., Michi, K. (1990)

Ilactors contributing to skeletal relapse after surgical correction of

mandibular prognathism.

J. Craniomaxillofac. S*9. 18: 195-200.

Page 239: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

239

Miller, P.4., Savara, 8.S., Singh,I.J. Q966)

Analysis of errors in cephalometric measurement of th¡ee dimensional

distances on the maflla.

Angle Orthod. 36: 1.69-175.

Mills,I.R.E. (7966)

Long term results of the proclination of lower incisors.

Br. DenL 1.120 355-63.

Midtgard, J ., Bjork, G., Linder-Aronson, S. (197 4)

Reproducibility of cephalometric landmarks and errors of measurements

of cephalometric cranial distances.

Angle Orthod. M: 56-61,.

Miller, P.4., Savara, 8.S., Singh, I.J. lú966)

Analysis of errors in cephalometric measurement of three dimensional

distances on the maxilla.

Angle Orthod. 36:'1.69-175.

Mommaerts, M.Y., Marxer, H. (7987)

A cephalometric analysis of the long term, soft tissue profile changes

which accompany the advancement of the mandible by sagittal split

ramus osteotomies.

J. Craniomaxillofac. S*9. 1.5: 127 -'1.3J..

Moore, K.E., Gooris, P.J., Stoelin ga, P.J. 0991)

The contributing role of condylar resorption to skeletal relapse following

mandibular advancement surgery: report of five cases.

J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 49: M8-60.

Page 240: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

240

Moser, K., Freihofer, H.P.M. (1980)

Long term experience with simultaneous movement of the upper and

lower jaw.

J. Maxillofac. Surg. 8: 271,-277.

Moss, J.P. (1973)

An electromyographic investigation of certain muscle activities associated

with malocclusion of teeth.

Ph.D Thesis, University Of London.

Moss, J.P., Chalmers, C. (1974)

An electromyographic investigation of various jaw positions in normal

dass III patients.

Arn. I. Orthod. 66: 538-556.

Moss,l.P. (1984)

A cephalometric and electromyographic investigation of patients

treated for the correction of mandibular prognathism by mandibular

surgery only.

Br. I. Orthod. 11: 59-68.

Moss,I.P. (1990)

A cephalometric and electromyographic investigation of patients

treated for the correction of mandibular prognathism by mandibular

surgery only.

Int. J. Orthod. 28:1..3-20.

Page 241: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

241

Moyers, R.E. (1932)

Handbook of Orthodontics. (4th edn).

Year Book Medical Publishers, Chicago. p.259.

Moyers, R.E., and Booksteiry F.L. (1979)

The inappropriateness of conventional cephalometrics.

Am. I. Orthod. 75: 599-617.

Nanda, R.S. (1955)

The rates of growth of several facial components measured from serial

cephalometric roentenograms.

Am. I. Orthod. 4'1,:658.

Nickerson, J.W. Jr., Veaco, N.S. (1989)

Condylotomy in surgery of the temporomandibular joint

Oral Maxillofacial Surg. Clin. North Am. 1: 303.

Nordenhah, 4., Waller, A. (1968)

Oral surgical correction of mandibular protrusion.

Brit J. Oral Surg.6:64,74.

Nordin, T., Nystroh, E., Rosenquist, J., Astrand P. (1986)

Extraoral or intraoral approach in the oblique sliding osteotomy of the

mandibular rami.

J. Craniomaxillofac. S*9. 1.5: 233-237 .

Norman, De Burgh J., Painter, D. (1980)

Hyperplasia of the mandibular condyle.

J. Maxillofac. Surg. 8: 767-175.

Page 242: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

242

Nystrom, E., Rosenquist, J., Astrand, P., Nordin,T. (19U)

Intraoral or extraoral approach in oblique sliding osteotomy of the

mandibular ramus.

f. Maxillofac. Surg. 72:277-282.

Obwegeser, H.L. (1957)

Surgical procedures to correct mandibular prognathism and reshaping of

the chin.

Oral Surg.19:677-689.

Obwegeser, H.L., Marentett e, L.I. (1986)

Profile planning based on alterations in the positions of the bases of the

facial thirds.

J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. M:302-311.

Obwegeser,H.L., Makek, M. S. (1986)

Hemimandibular hyperplasia-hemimandibular elongation.

J. Maxillofac. Surg. 14: 183-208.

Onland, J.M., Merkx, C.A. (1972)

Over de chirurgische behandeling van de mandibtilaire prognathie

Ned. Tijdschr. Tandheelkd. 79: l-20.

Palmer, J. F. (1935)

The Works of John Hunter, Vol II, London, Logman,

cited by Hinds, E.C. and Kent, J.N.: Surgical Treatrnent of Developmental

Jaw Deformities.

St. Louis, C.V. Mosby,1.972.

Page 243: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

243

Pancherz, H., Hansen, K. (1984)

The nasion sella reference line in cephalometry: A methodologic study.

Am. I. Orthod. 86: 427-4M.

Parker, M. G., Lehman, J.4., Martin, D.E. (1989)

Mandibular prognathism.

Clin- Plast. Sutg. '1.6:677-85.

Pascoe, J.J.,Hayward, J.R., Costich, E.R. (1960)

Mandibular prognathism: its aetiology and a classification.

f. Oral Sutg.Anesth. Hosp. Dent. Serv. "1.8:27-24.

Paulus, G.W., Steinhauser, E.W. (7982)

A comparative study of wire osteosynthesis versus bone screws in the

treatment of mandibular prognathism.

Oral Surgery 54:2-6.

Pepersack, W.J., Chausse, I.M. (1978)

Long term follow up of the sagittal splitting technique for correction of

mandibular prognathism.

|. Maxillofac. Surg. 6:177-'1,40.

Petersson, 4., Willmar-Hogeman, K. (1989)

Radiographic changes of the TMJ after oblique sliding osteotomy of the

mandibular rami.

Int. f. Oral Maxillofac. S*9. "1,8:27-33.

Page 244: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

2M

Phillips, C., Zaytourt, H.S., Thomas, P.M. et al. (1986)

Skeletal alterations following TOVRO or BSSO procedures.

Int J. Adult Orthod. Orthognath. Surg. 1,:203-2'1.3.

Phillips, C., Snow, M.D., Turvey, T.4., Proffit, W.R.

The effect of orthognathic surgery on head posture.

Eur. J. Orthod. 13:397-403.

Phillips, C, Greer,I.,Vig, P., Matteson, S. (19U)

Photocephalometry: Errors of projection and landmark location

Am. I. Orthod. 86:233-243.

Phillips, R.M., Bell, H. (1978)

Atrophy of mandibular condyles after sagittal ramus split osteotomy:

report of a case.

f. Oral S*9. 36:4549.

Picton, D.C., Moss,I.P. (1978)

The effect of reducing cusp height on the rate of approximal drift of cheek

teeth in adult monkeys (Macaca lrus).

Arch. Oral Biol. 23: 219-223.

Picton, D.C., Moss,I.P. (1980)

The effect of approximal drift of altering the horizontal component of

biting force in adult monkeys (Macaca Irus).

Arch. Oral Biol. 25:45-48.

Page 245: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

245

Poulton, D.R., Ware, W.H. (1973)

Surgical-orthodontic treatment of severe mandibular retrusion.

Am. I. Orthod. 63:237-255.

Poulton, D.R., Ware, W.H., Baumrind, S., Crane, D. (7979)

Surgical mandibular advancement studied with computer aided

cephalometrics.

Am. I. Orthod. 76:121,-1,35.

Poulton, D. R., Taylor, R.C., Ware, W.H. (1,963)

Cephalometric X-ray evaluation of the vertical osteotomy correction of

mandibular prognathism.

Oral Surg.'1.6: 807-820.

Proffit, W.R. and White, R.P. (1970)

Treatrnent of severe malocclusions by correlated orthodontic - surgical

procedures.

Angle Orthod.40: 1-10.

Profitt, W.R., Phillips, C., Dann, C., Turvey,T. (7997)

Stability after surgical-orthodontic correction of skeletal class III

malocclusion. I. Mandibular setback.

Int j. Adult Orthod. Orthognath. Surg. 6:7-78.

Quinn, P.D., Wedell, D. (1988)

Complications from intraoral vertical subsigmoid osteotomy: review of

literature and report of two cases.

Int J. Adult Orthod. Orthognath. Surg. 3:'1.89-196.

Page 246: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

246

Rakosi, T., Schilli, W. (1981)

Class III anomalies.

j. Oral S*9. 39: f360-870.

Raustia, 4.M., Oikarinen, K.S. (1994)

Changes in electric activity of masseter and temporal muscles after

mandibular sagittal split osteotomy.

Int. f. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 23:'1.8U'1.M.

Reichenbach, E. (1955)

Fortschr. Kiefer-, Gesichts-chfu. Bd. 1

Georg Thieme, Stuttgart.

Reitzik, M. (1988)

The surgical correction of mandibular prognathism using rigid internal

fixation - a report of a new technique together with its long term stability

Annals of the Royal College of Surgeons 70: 380-385.

Reitzik, M. (1983)

Cortex to cortex healing after mandibular osteotomy

J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 4'1.:658-663.

Reitzik, M. (1982)

The biometry of mandibular osteotomy repair.

J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 40:27Ç278.

Page 247: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

247

Reitzik, M. (1980a)

Skeletal and dental changes after surgical correction of mandibular

prognathism.

J. Oral Sutg.38: 109-116.

Rheinwald, U. (1967)

Die Zungenverkleinerung als unterstutzende Massnahme der Progenie-

Behandlung.

Dtsch. Zahn-Mund-Kieferheilkd 49: 93-99.

Rhoads, ]. E., Kasinskas, W. (7942)

The influence of hypoproteinemia on formation of callus in

experimental fracture.

S*9. 'I.,'l.,:3844.

Richardson, A. (1966)

An investigation into the reproducibility of some points, planes and

lines used in cephalometric analysis.

Am.I. Orthod. 52: 637-651.

Richardsotr, A. (1981)

A comparison of traditional and computerized methods of cephalometric

analysis.

Eur. j. Orthod.3:15-20

Ricketts, R.M. (1981)

Perspectives in the clinical application of cephalometrics.

Angle Orthod. 51: 115-150.

Page 248: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

248

Riolo, M.L., Moyers, R.E., McNamara, J.4., Hunter, W.S. (1.974)

An atlas of craniofacial growth.

Centre for human growth and development, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

Ritzau M. (1973)

Weight changes in patients with intermafllary fixation immobilization

after jaw fracture.

Int. J. Oral Surg.2:122-3.

Ritzau, M., Wenzel, 4., Williams, S. (1989)

Changes in condyle position after bilateral vertical ramus osteotomy with

and without osteosynthesis.

Am. I. Orthod. Dentofacial Orthop. 96: 507-73.

Robinson, M. (1958)

Prognathism corrected by open vertical subcondylotomy.

J. Oral S.,rg. 1,6:215-219.

Robinson, M. (1,970)

Prognathism corrected by open oblique sliding osteotomy of the

mandibular rami.

Oral Surg.29:323-327.

Robinson, M. (1959)

Mandibular prognathism corrected by overlapping open vertical

osteotomies of the rami.

Am. J. Surg. 98: 89Ç897.

Page 249: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

249

Rodgers, S., Burnett, R., Goss 4.N., Phillips, P., Goldney, R., Kimber, C.,

Thomas, D., Harding,P., Wise, P. (1977)

Jaw wiring in treatment of obesity.

Lancet 1.:1221..

Rosenquist,B., Rune, 8., Selvik, G. (1985)

Displacement of the mandible after removal of the intermaxillary fixation

following oblique sliding osteotomy. A stereometric and cephalometric

radiographic study.

|. Maxillofac. Surg. 13:254.

Rosenquist,B., Rune, 8., Selvik, G. (1982)

Movement of bone segments after oblique sliding osteotomy of the

mandibular rami studied by means of roentgen stereometry and metallic

implants.

IRCS 10:596.

Rosenquist, B. (1990)

Medial displacement of prodmal segments.

Int. J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 19:226-229.

Rosenquist, B. (1988)

Condylar displacement after oblique sliding osteotomy of the mandibular

rami.

J. Craniomaxillofac. S*9. 76: 301.-307.

Page 250: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

250

Rosenquist,8., Rune, 8., Selvik, G. (1986)

Displacement of the mandible after removal of the intermaxillary

fixation following oblique sliding osteotomy.

j. Maxillofac. Surg. 74:251,-259.

Rosenquist, 8., Selvik, G., Rune, 8., Petersson, A. (1987)

Stability of the osteotomy site after oblique sliding osteotomy of the

mandibular rami.

J. Craniomaxillofac. Sutg. 1.5:'1.4-19.

Rotskoff, K.S., Herbosa, E.G., Nickels, B. (1991)

Correction of condylar displacement following intraoral vertical ramus

osteotomy.

J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 49:36G72.

Salzmann,I.A. (1960)

The research workshop on cephalometrics.

Am. I. Orthod. 46: 834-847.

Salzmann, J.A. (1964)

Limitations of roentgenographic cephalometrics.

Am. I. Orthod. 50: 1,69-1,87.

Sanborn, R. T. (1955)

Differences between the facial skeletal patterns of class III malocclusion

and normal occlusion.

Angle Orthod. 25: 208-222.

Page 251: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

251.

Sandler, P.I. (1988)

Reproducibility of cephalometric measurements.

Brit J. Orthod. 15: 105-110.

Sandor, G.K., Stoelinga, P.J.W., Tideman, H., Leenen, R. I. Q984)

The role of intraosseous osteosynthesis wire in the sagittal split

osteotomies for mandibular advancements.

J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 42:231,-237.

Savage, 4.W., Showfety, K.J., Yancey,J. Q,987)

Repeated measures analysis of geometrically constructed and directly

determined cephalometric points.

Am. I. Orthod. Dentofac. Orthop. 9"1,: 295-299.

Savara, B., Takeuchi, Y. (1979)

Anatomic location of cephalometric landmarks on the sphenoid and

temporal bones.

Angle Orthod. 49: "1,41.-1,49.

Savara,8.S., Tracy,W.E., Miller, P.A. (1966)

Analysis of errors in cephalometric measurements of three dimensional

distances on the human mandible.

A¡ch. Oral Biol. 11,: 209-217.

Schaefer,I.E. (1941)

Correction of malocclusion by surgical interference.

Am. I. Orthod. Oral Surg. 27: 172-178.

Page 252: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

252

Schneiderman, E.D., Carlson, D.S., (1985)

Cephalometric analysis of condylar adaptations to altered mandibular

position in adult rhesus monkeys. Macaca Mulatta.

Arch. Oral Biol. 30:49-54.

Schendel, S.4., Epker, B.N. (1980)

Results after mandibular advancement surgery: an analysis of 87 cases.

J. Oral S.ttg. 38:265-282.

Scott, J.H. (1967)

The anatomy of cephalometrics. In: Dentofacial development and

growth. Oxford Pergamon Press, Oxford. pp.175-190.

Sekiguchi, T. and Savara, B.S. (7972)

Variability of cephalometric landmarks used for face growth studies.

Am.I. Orthod. 61: 603-618.

Selvik, G. (1974)

A roentgen stereophotogrammetric method for study of the kinematics

of the skeletal system.

Thesis. AV-Centralen, University Of Lund.

Sesenna, E., Raffaini, M. (1985)

Bilateral condylar atrophy after combined osteotomy for correction of

mandibular retrusion.

J. Maxillofac. Surg. 13:263-266.

Page 253: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

253

Shepherd I.P. (1980)

Changes in the mandibular ramus following osteotomy - a long term

review.

Br.I. Oral Surg. 18: 189-201.

Shira, R.B. (1961)

Surgical correction of open bite deformities by oblique sliding osteotomy.

J. Oral S*9. 19:275-290.

Shiratsuch, Y., Kouno, K., Tashiro, H. (1991)

Evaluation of masticatory function following orthognathic surgical

correction of mandibular prognathism.

J. Craniomaxillofac. Surg. 79 299-303.

Simpson, W. (1974)

The results of surgery for mandibular prognathism.

Br. I. Oral Surg. 12: -1,66-176.

Slootweg, P.f., Muller, H. (1986)

Condylar hyperplasia. A clinicopathological analysis of 22 cases

f. Maxillofac. Surg.'1,4: 209-2'1.4.

Sluiter, R.M., Ligthelm-Bakker, A.S.W.M.R., Wattel, E. (1985)

A new method for cornputer aided serial radiograph superimpositioning

Eur. J. Orthod. 7:'1.03-707.

Page 254: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

254

Smeets, J.H. (1969)

Een studie over de veranderingen in tongpositie bij geoereerde progenie

patienten.

Ned. Tijdschr. Tandheelk d. 7 6: 923-933

Smith, 4.E., Robinson, M. (1954)

Surgical correction of mandibular prognathism by subsigmoid notch

ostectomy with sliding condylotomy: a new technic.

I. Am. Dent. 4.49:46-62.

Smith, A.E. and Johnson, I.B. (1940)

Surgical treatment of mandibular deformations.

¡. Am. Dent. Ãss.27:689.

Smith, G.C., Moloney, F.8., West, R.A. (1985)

Mandibular advancement surgery.

Oral Surg.60:467475.

Solow, 8., Kreiborg, S. 09n)

Soft tissue stretching: a possible contributing factor on craniofacial

morphogenesis.

Scand. J. Dent. Res.85:503.

Solow, B. (1966)

The pattern of craniofacial associations

Acta. Odont. Scand. 24 Suppl.46.

Page 255: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

255

Sorokolit, C.4., Nanda, R.S. (1990)

Assessment of the stability of mandibular setback procedures with rigid

fixation.

f. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 48:817-822.

Sperber, G.H. (1976)

Craniofacial embryology (2nd edn).

John Wright & Sons Ltd. p 717

Spiessl, B (1974)

Osteosynthese bei sagittaler osteotomie nach Obwegeser-Dal Pont.

Fortschr. Keifer-Gesichtschir. 18: 145-148.

Stacy, G.C. (1987)

Recovery of oral opening following sagittal ramus osteotomy for

mandibular prognathism.

f. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 45:487492.

Steiner, C.C. (1953)

Cephalometrics for you and me

Am. I. Orthod. 39: 729-755.

Stella, (1986)

Pattern and aetiology of relapse after correction of class III open bite prior

to subcondylar ramus osteotomy.

Int f. Adult Orthod. Orthognattu Surg. 1.:9"1.-99.

Page 256: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

256

Stepovich, M.L. (1965)

A cephalometric positional study of the hyoid bone.

Am. I. Orthod. 51: 882-900.

Storum, K.4., Bell, W.H. (1986)

The effect of physical rehabilitation of mandibular function after ramus

osteotomies.

f. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. M:9Ç99.

Strabrun, 4.E., Danielsen, K. (1982)

Precision in cephalometric landmark identification.

Eur. |. Orthod. 4:185-196.

Sund, G., Eckerdal,O., Astrand, P. (1983)

Changes in the temporomandibular joint after sliding osteotomy of the

mandibular rami.

|. Maxillofac. Surg. 1'1.: 87 -9'1..

Tanner, I.M., Whitehouse, R.FI., Takaischi, M. (1966)

Standards from birth to maturity Lor height, weight and velocity in

British children.

Arch. Dis. Child. 41,: 453-77.

Thoma, K.H. (1961)

Oblique osteotomy of the mandibular ramus.

Oral Surg.'1,4:23 -46.

Page 257: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

257

Tornes, K. (1989)

Osteotomy length and post operative stability in vertical subcondylar

ramus osteotomy.

Acta. Odontol. Scand. 42:8j,-88

Tornes, K. (1987)

Extraoral and intraoral vertical subcondylar ramus osteotomy) for

correction of mandibular prognathism.

Int.I. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 76:677-677.

Tornes, K., Wisth, P.I. (1988)

Stability after vertical subcondylar ramus osteotomy for correction of

mandibular prognathism.

Int. J. Oral Maxillofac. Sutg. 17:242-248.

Tracy, W.E. and Savara, B.S. (1966)

Norms in size and annual increments of seven anatomical measures of

maúllae in girls from three to sixteen years of age.

Arch. Oral Biol. 1,1.: 587-59.

Trauner, R., Obwegeser, H. (7957)

The surgical correction of mandibular prognathism and retrognathia

with consideration of genioplasty. Part II operating methods for

microgenia and distocclusion.

Oral Surg. Oral Med. Oral Path.1.0:899-909.

Page 258: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

258

Troyer, S.H. (1971)

Ankylosis of the coronoid process of the mandible to the zygornatic arch

subsequent to the surgical correction of prognathism.

J. Hosp. DenL PracL 5: L9-35.

Tuinzing, D.8., Greebe, R.B. (1985)

Complications related to the intraoral vertical ramus osteotomy.

Int. J. Oral Surg.1,4:319-324,

Tuinzing, D.B., Greebe, R.8., Vander Kwast, W.A.M. (1983)

Eagle like syndrome.

Int. J. Oral Surg.12:319-322.

Ueda, K., Kobayashi, M., Nakajima, T., Sasakura, H., Hanada, K. (1986)

Three dimensional prediction of mandibular movement in the

treatment of prognathism.

J. Oral Maxillofac. S*9. M: 2'1,-30.

Valk, I.W., Zonnenberg, A.1., Van Maanen, C.f., Van Wonderen, O.G. (1,992)

The biomechanical effects of a sagittal split ramus osteotomy on the

relationship of the mandible, the hyoid bone and the cervical spine.

Am. I. Orthod. Dentofacial Orthop .'/.,02: 99-1.08.

Van Aken,J.Q963)

Geometrical errors in lateral skull X ray projections.

Ned Tijdschr. Tandheelkd. 70:'1,8.

Page 259: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

259

Van der Linden, F.P.G. (1971)

A study of roentgenocephalometric bony landmarks

Am. I. Orthod. 59:777-725.

Van Merkesteyn, J.P.R., Groot, R.H., Van Leeuwaarden, R.,

Kroon, F.H.M. (1987)

Intraoperative complications in sagittal and vertical ramus osteotomies.

Int. |. Oral Maxillofac. Sutg. 1,6:665-670.

Van Sickels, J., Larsen, 4., Thrash, W. (1988)

A retrospective study of relapse in rigidly fixated sagittal split

osteotomies: contributing factors.

Am.I. Ortho. Dentofac. Orthop. 93:413-41.8.

Van Vuuren, C. (1991)

A review of the literature on the prevalence of class III malocclusion and

the mandibular prognathic growth hypotheses.

Aust. Orthod. l. 72: 23-28.

Vasir, N.S., Thompson, R.T., Davies,T.M. (1991)

Dental and skeletal changes following sagittal split osteotomy for

correction of mandibular prognathism.

Eur. J. Orthod. 73:134-42.

Vermeeren, J.I.J.F. (1976)

Indications for reduction of tongue in surgical treatrnent of mandibular

prognathism.

Int. J. Oral Surg.5: 107-110.

Page 260: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

260

Vijayaraghavan, K., Richardson, 4., Whitlock, R.I.H. (1974)

Post operative relapse following sagittal split osteotomy.

Br. J. Oral S*9. 12:63-69.

Vincent, A. and West, V. (1987)

Cephalometric landmark identification error.

Aust. Orthod. J. 10:98-104.

Walker, R.V., Collins, T. A. (1971)

Surgery or orthodontics - a philosophy of approach.

Dent. Clin. North Am. 1.5: 771-92.

Wang, J.H., Waite, D.E. (1975)

Vertical osteotomy vs sagittal split osteotomy of the mandibular ramus:

comparison of operative and postoperative factors.

|. Oral S*9.33: 596-600.

Ware, W. H., Taylor, R.C. (1968)

Condylar repositioning following osteotomies for correction of

mandibular prognathism.

Am. I. Orthod. 54: 50-59.

Wei, S.H.Y. (1965)

Craniofacial variations in a group of Chinese students.

M.D.S. Thesis, The University of Adelaide, South Australia

Wei, S.H.Y. (1968)

The variability of roentogenographic cephalometric lines of references

Angle Orthod. 38 74-78.

Page 261: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

261.

Weinberg, 5., Craft, I. (1980)

Unilateral atrophy of the mandibular condyle after closed subcondylar

osteotomy for correction of mandibular prognathism.

J. Oral S*9. ß:366-368.

Welch, T.B. (1989)

Stability in the correction of dentofacial deformities: a comprehensive

review.

I. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 47: 1,"J.42-1749

Wenzel, 4., Williams, S., Ritzau, M. (1989a)

Changes in head posture and nasopharlmgeal airway following surgical

correction of mandibular prognathism.

Eur. I. Orthod.'1,'1,: 37-42.

Wenzel, 4., Williams, S., Ritzau, M. (1989b)

Relationships of changes in craniofacial morphology, head posture and

nasopharyngeal airway size following mandibular osteotomy.

Arn.I. Orthod. Dentofac. Orthop. 96:738-43

Werndah, L., Blomquist, E. (1981)

Intraoral sned ramus osteotomi vid behandling av mandibular prognati.

Tandlakartidningen 73: 460.

Wessberg, G.4., Epker, B.N. (1981)

The influence of mandibular advancement via modified sagittal split

ramus osteotomy on the masticatory musculature.

Oral Surg.S2:113-717.

Page 262: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

262

Wessberg, G.A., Schendel, S.4., Epker, B.N. (7982)

The role of suprahyoid myotomy in surgical advancement of the

mandible in via sagittal split ramus osteotomies.

J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 40:273-277.

Westesson,P.L., Dahlberg, G., Hannson, L.G., Eriksson, L., Ketonen,L. (7997)

Osseous and muscular changes after vertical ramus osteotomy. A

magnetic resonance imaging study.

Oral Surg. Oral Med. Oral Path.72:139-145.

White, R.P., Peters, P.8., Costich, E.R., Page, H.L. (7969)

Evaluation of sagittal split ramus osteotomy in 77 patients.

J. Oral Sutg. 27: 851-855

Wickwire, N.4., White, R.P. Jr., Proffit, W.R. (1972)

The effect of mandibular osteotomy on tongue position.

J. Oral Su.g. 30:184-190.

Wilbanks, J.L. (1977)

Correction of mandibular prognathism by double oblique intraoral

osteotomy. A new technique.

Oral Surg. 3"1,: 32'1,-327.

Willmar, K.N. (1974)

On Le Fort I osteotomy.

Scand. f. Plast Reconstr. Surg. Suppl. 12.

Page 263: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

263

Willmar, K.N., Hogeman, K.E., Thiseus, S. (1979)

Sagittal split osteotomy in our experience. A follow up study of 100

operated patients.

Scand. f. Plast. Reconstr. Surg. '1,3:445-452.

Will, L. A., Joondeph, D.R., Hohl, T. H., West, R.A. (1984)

Condylar position following mandibular advancement: Its relationship

to relapse.

J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 42:578-588.

Willmot, D.R., Moss, J.P., (7984)

Changes in the axial inclinations of upper and lower incisors after

mandibular surgery in class III cases.

j. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 12:763-'1,66.

Winstanley, R.P. (1968)

Subcondylar osteotomy of the mandible and the intraoral approach.

Br. J. Oral S*9. 6:'1.34-736.

Wisth, P.H., Tornes, K. (1975)

Radiographic changes in temporomandibular joint subsequent to vertical

ramus osteotomy.

Int. J. Oral Surg.4:242-250.

Wisth, P.H. (1981)

What happened to them? Postoperative survey of patients ten years after

surgical correction of mandibular prognathisms.

Am. I. Orthod. 80: 525-535.

Page 264: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

264

Wolford, L.M., Hillliard, F.W., Dugan, D.l. (1985)

Surgical treatment obi ectives.

C.V. Mosby,St. Louis.

Wolford, L.M., Walker, G., Schendel, S., Fish, L.C., Epker, B.N. (1978)

Mandibular deficiency syndrome. I. Clinical delineation and therapeutic

significance.

Oral Surg.45:329-348.

Worms F., Spiedel, T.M., Bevis, R.R., Waite, D.E. (1980)

Post treahnent stability and esthetics of orthognathic surgery.

Angle Orthod. 50: 251,-273.

Worrall, S.F. (1994)

Changes in weight and body composition after orthognathic surgery and

jaw fractures: a comparison of miniplates and intermaxillary fixation.

Br. I. Oral Maxillofac. S*9. 32: 289-292.

Yates, C., Olson, D., Guralnick, W, (7976)

The antilingula as anatomic landmark in oral surgery.

Oral Surg. 4'1.: 705-708.

Yellich, G.M., McNamar a, I.A., Ungerleider, J.C., (1981)

Muscular and mandibular adaptation after lengthening, detachment and

reattachment of masseter muscle.

f. Oral S*9. 39:656-665.

Page 265: University of Adelaide...2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES................. LIST OF TABLES................... 1..1 Oaeraiew....... 1.2 Vertical ramus osteotomy. T REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE

265

Yen, P.K.J. (1960)

Identification of landmarks in cephalometric radiography.

Angle Orthod. 30: 35-41.

Zaytoun, H.S., Phillips, C., Terry, B.C. (1986)

Long term neurosensory deficits following transoral vertical ramus and

sagittal split osteotomies for mandibular prognathism.

J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. M:193-196.

Zec}na, J.J., Esser, R.J., Cnossen, J. í978)

Adjustable retainer in sagittal ramus split osteotomy

Int. J. Oral Surg.7:3G38.

Zintel, H.A. (1964)

Nutrition and care of the surgical patient. In: Wohl, M. G. and

Goodhart, R. S. (eds)

Modern nutrition in health and disease. (3rd edn).

Philadelphia, Lea & Febiger p 7043-1,064.